人教新高二教案学案一体化unit5-6(新课标版高二英语必修五教案教学设计)

“藤崎匹萨”通过精心收集，向本站投稿了13篇人教新高二教案学案一体化unit5-6(新课标版高二英语必修五教案教学设计)，下面是小编为大家整理后的人教新高二教案学案一体化unit5-6(新课标版高二英语必修五教案教学设计)，如果喜欢可以分享给身边的朋友喔!

篇1：人教新高二教案学案一体化unit5-6

Unit 6 Life In the Future

Teaching aims and demands

话题 1．Talking about life in the future2．Making predictions

词汇 prediction exact forecast trend contemporary indicate urban ensureconsumer reform goods purchase tiny cash remain importancemedical deal physician cure biochemistry educator distance hopefulwrist require programme(v) reality absurd

keep in touch with…pay attention to deal with in store

功能 猜测、假想(Making predictions)We can only guess．．．No one can predict what／when．．．Just imagine if．．．It's Ipossible／impossible to predict…It would be wonderful if．．．It would be bad for…if…

语法 名词性从句(Noun clause)(2)1．主语从句How we should use modern technology is a big issue．2．宾语从句They are careful about what they eat．3．表语从旬The problem is how we can develop transportation without polluting the environment.

LISTENING TEXT：

Parlt 1

Hello!Greetings from tlle future!My name's Mekanika and I live in me year 3044．Well，that’s what yon would can it．We can it the year 58 AL．AL means“After Leaving”．You see，58 years ago，people on the earth decided that they had to do something to save the people on the planet．There were so many people on the earth，and there was so much pollution，that the only way to keep the planet from dying was to send people into space.My family was one of the chosen ones.About one third of the earth’s population was left back home, and the rest of us went into space.We are now living in a new city on the planet Mars.Life here is very nice,and we are happy in our home.We still keep in touch with the people on earth and some of us go back home are doing their best to clean up the plant.My grandparents and parents tell me about the earth and it sounds like a beautiful place .when my scientice teacher told me that we could use our school’s time machine to send messages to the past,I want to send one to you and tell you about life here.

Part 2

Every morning，I have to get up at two o’clock.That probably sounds very strange to you，but，you have a different time system here．We divide into eight parts．Two o'clock in the morning here on Mars is almost like six o’clock on earth.I eat breakfast with my family before I go to school. The food here is different from your food：we eat pills and drink juice to stay healthy.My history book says that you ate something called bread and even ate meat from other animals!That sounds very strange to me．We don't eat any animals here and I’ve even seen bread．At three thirty I catch the schoo1 spaceship and fly to class．We don't have schoo1s and

classrooms．We meet our learning guides(you called them teachers)in different places and solve problems together．I love schoo1．My friends are wonderful and I like to think about the world in new ways．I also like creating things with my mind box (you called it a computer)．I’m very interested in what you call‘‘painting”and“singing”．Can you please tell me more about what they are?I’ve read about your life in my history book，but it’s difficult to understand how you lived such a long time ago．Could you please write to me and teⅡme about your life?Thank you．I have to get back to work．I have a test in Marsgeography next week，so I need to prepare for it．

Best wishes，Mekanika

AnSwers to Par-t 1：

1 3044(or 58 AL)．

2 Mekanika lives on Mars．

3 They had to leave because the population was growing too large and there was too much pollution．

4 She is writing the letter because her science teacher asked her to send a 1etter to the past．

Answers to Part 2：

Time Food School Transportation

Mekanika's life One day is divided into eight parts．Twoo'clock in the morningon Mars is like sixo'clock on earth． People eat pills anddrink juice． There are no schoool orclassrooms．Studentsmeet their 1earningguides in differentplaces and solveproblems together． Mekanika flies toclass in the schoo1spaceship．

Our life One day is 24 hour. We eat meat，fruitsand vegetables． We study in sch00lsand classrooms andwe leam from booksand teachers． We go to schoo1 onbikes or by bus．

阅读本单元课文，完成下列各题：

§1．1细枝末节

(Passage 1)

1 What may lead to changes in the way diseases are cured and medicines are made?

A．Healthy diet and active 1ife．

B．Eating and exercises．

C．Advances in medical science．

D．New discoveries in genetics and biochemistry．

2 What's the meaning of the future transportation in Paragraph 2?

A．No pollution． B．High speed．

C．Safety． D．All of the above．

(Passage 2)

3 What does an e-friend can do in the future

A．It can helD us with our homework．

B．It can walk and talk with us．

C．It can clean up rooms．

D．All of the above mentioned．

4 What can we see in the year 3044 when we use a cell-phone showing pictures?

A．We can see the picture of the person who speaks to US．

B．We can recognize the voice．

C．We can see a lifelike model of the person．

D．We can hear if they are happy，sad，interested，etc．

5 In the year 3044，using computer，programmes can_____.

A．copy the world and people

B．send old-fashioned e-mails

C．help you to make an e-friend

D．travel back in time and visit friends

§1．2主旨大意

6 What does the last paragraph of Passage 1 mainly talk about?

A．E-learning． B．Knowledge．

C．Efforts． D．Education．

7 What's the main idea of Passage 2 ?

A．Life in the year 3044 and life in the 21st century are quite dIfferent．

B．E-friends can help us do everything．

C．We don't need to meet again in the year 3044 because of the computer．

D．None of the above．

§1．3推理判断

8 From Passage 1，what can we conclude?

A．Life in the future can be predicted in the way of exam-

ining the major trends at present．

B．Life in the future won't be imagined by us at present．

C．Life in the future w．1l last for ever．

D．Life in the future can be completely controlled by computer．

9 What can we infer from Passage 1 ?

A．There wIll be no schools for us to be educated．

B．In the future we will have no diseases．

C．Life in the future will be towards perfect．

D．The importance of computer in the future life．

10 What can we infer from Passage 2 ?

A．Mekanika lives a lonely life．

B．Life in the year 3044 makes Mekanika feel happy．

C．Mekanika doesn't do anything in the year 3044．

D．Mekanika welcomes us to the year 3044．

重点难点讲解

1．How will people communicate in the future?

(1)communicate作“传递”：communicate．．．to sb．

eg：He communicated his intention to me．他把他的意向告诉了我。

(2)communicate作“交往，交际”，communite with… eg：

we can communicate with people in most parts of the world by phone．

(3)communicate的名词是：communication，意思是“交流”，“沟通”，“通信，联络”，其形容词是：communicative“爱说话的，直言不讳的”

eg：Language is a major means of communication，but communication between people who speak different language is difficult．虽然语言是主要的交际工具，可是语言不相同的时候，沟通起来就十分困难了。

He is a communicative person．他是位直言不讳的人。

2．What happened to the people on the earth?地球上的人发生了什么事情?

(A) happen to sb．发生于……身上

eg：She hoped nothing bad would happen to her．

(B) happen to do碰巧(偶然)…eg：

I happened to see him on the street．我碰巧在街上见到他。

(C) on the earth”在地球上”相对于其他星球而言。

eg：The sun is much hotter than any fire on the earth．

(D)in the earth“在地里，在地下”

eg：There is much oilin the earth．地下有大量的石油。

(E)on earth有以下五种用法：

(1)“在人世间，在世界上”相当于 in the world,一般用于肯定句中。

Unexpected things always happen on earth．

(2)“在陆地上,在地面上”,这时和天空(sky)或天(heaven)相对,冠词可有可无。

eg：And it was one of the few man-made objects on earth that could be seen by the astronauts who landed on the moon．它是登上月球的宇航员所能看到的地面上为数不多的人造物之一。

(3)“到底，究竟”常与who，what，when，where，how，why等连用，以加强语气，含有惊奇、愤怒、敬佩等感情色彩。

eg：How on earth did you know it?你到底是怎么知道这件事的

(4)用在形容词或副词最高级后以加强语气。

eg：The Yangtze River is one 0f the longest rivers on earth．长江是世界上最长的河流之一。

(1) 作“全然，一点也不”解，用于否定句，以加强语气。

eg：Nothing on earth could make him change his mind．

无论什么也不能使他改变注意。

In the winter some animals hide______

A．in the earth B．on earth

C．on the earth D．at the earth

3．It would be bad for society if people had doubles…．如果人们有替身，那会对社会有害的.这是一个虚拟语气句子，其中if people had doubles为非真实条件状语从句。英语中，表示在说话人看来实现可能性很小的将来事态，或表示与现在事态相反的主观设想时，运用虚拟语气。其主句的谓语动词用would／could／might／should后接动词原形，

条件状语从句的谓语动词用过去式形式(动词是be时，一律用were)。 eg：He would visit us if he were in town．

If Richard worked hard next term，he might pass the exam．

【拓展】当表示与过去的事态相反的主观设想时，主旬谓语动词would／could／might／should后接完成式形式，条件状语从句的谓语动词用过去完成式形式。

eg：We would have called you if we had known your telephone number．If you'd told me，I'd have paid him of course．

1．If he _____here earlier。He____ not miss the train．

A．comes：will B．came；will

C．came；would D．comes；would

2．They would not___in the last exam if they__very hard．

A．fail；studied B．have failed；had studied

C．failed；have studied D．fail；had studied

4.交际用语讲解

用于表示预测的日常交际用语

It would be wonderful if…如果……那太好了

It's possible／impossible to predict．．．

预测……是可能的／不可能的

Just imagine if…想像一下如果……

It would be bad for．．．if．．．如果……那对于太糟了……

No one can predict what／when,．．没有人能预测……

We can only guess．．．我们只能猜测……eg：

It would be wonderful if I can join your club．‘

如果我能加入你们的俱乐部那太好了。

It is possible for me to go there next week．

下星期我有可能去那里。

It is impossible to predict the weather correctly without modern equipment．

没有现代设备准确预报天气是不可能的。

It would be bad for those farmers if it rains tomorrow．

如果明天下雨那对那些农民太糟了。

Can you imagine him becoming famous as an actor?

你能想像他成为一个名演员的情形吗?

Don't imagine I can lend you money every time you need it．

不要认为你需要钱时，我便会借给你。

It is very___that，in many schools，they are going to spend less time in the classroom than they used to．(，上海，)

A．possibly B．probably

C．1ovely D．1ikely

5. glimpse v: catch a glimpse of=get a glimpse of=have a glimpse of瞥见，一瞥

eg：I only caught a glimpse of the thief，so I can't really describe him．我只瞥见那窃贼一眼，所以说不出他的面貌。

【拓展】glimpse u．瞥见，看一眼

eg：I glimpsed her among the crowd j ust before she disappeared from sight．就 在她消失前的一刹那，我在人群中瞥见了她。

6．indicate．point to；point out；make known；

(1)指出，指示(point to)eg：I asked him where my sister was and he indicated the shop opposite．我问他我姐姐在哪里，他指指对面的商店。

(2)表示

eg：He indicates his willingness with a nod of his head．

他点头表示愿意。

(3)(以手势、指示灯等)指示

eg：He is indicating left．他指示车将要向左拐弯。

7．ensure保证；担保；保护，常用于

ensure sb．sth．，

ensure sb．against sth．或

ensure that-clause结构。

eg：This pill will ensure you a good night's sleep．

His recommendation will ensure me a job．

I can't ensure that she will be chosen as May Queen．

We should ensure ourselves against all possible risks．

(英译汉)_____________________________________________

8 remain

(1) 作“保持，依然”解。是连系动词，后接形容词、名词、过去分词或介词短语作表语。

eg：He remains poor all his life．

If you won't eat，you'll just have to remain hungry．

He became a doctor but his brother remained a farmer．

The work remained unfinished．。

The visit will always remain in my memory．

(2) remain也可作“遗留，剩下”解，是不及物动词，不能接宾语，也不用被动语态。

eg：If you take 3 from 8，5 remains．

如果把8减去了3，还剩下5。(八减三得3／)

The children ate and ate until no food remained on the table．

(3)remain还可作“留下，逗留”解。是不及物动词。

eg：I will remain to see the end 0f the match．

How many weeks will you remain(=stay)here?

(3) remain + to do连用，意思是“尚待”。

eg：Nothing remains to be said．无话可说。

It remains to be seen whether he will pass the test．

他能否通过这次考试仍不得而知。

【警示】(1)remain的名词形式有两种：remains意思是“剩余，残留物，等，remainder(常与the连用，单复数同形)，意思是“剩余的人(物)，其他的人(物)”

eg：(2)remain的形容词形式为remaining意思是“剩下的”，在句中作定语。

eg：This is my remaining property．我剩下的财产就是这。

(1)Because he is very lazy and has no job，his life__very poor．

A．still B．remains

C．is remained D．is left

(2)，The lady said she would buy a gift for her daughter with the______.

A．20 dollars remained C．remained 20 dollars

B．20 dollars to remain D．remaining 20 dollars

9 cure vt． 治愈；治疗

eg：This medicine will cure your headache．这药能治好你的头痛。

A few days’rest will cure you．休息几天你的病就会好的。

常构成短语；cure sb．of“治愈某人的……病；改掉某人的……恶习”：

The doctor cured him 0f cancer．医生治愈了他的癌症。

It seems that nobody can cure me of smoking．似乎没有人能使我戒烟。

n.治愈；治疗法

eg：His complete cure can't be expected．他完全恢复健康遥不可期。

他已改掉喝酒的习惯。(汉译英)

____________________________________________________

10．1ead to

(1)引起、造成、导致，+ 名词、代词或动名词

eg：His carelessness led to the accident．他的粗心导致了这次事故。

(2)通过，通向……eg：All roads lead to Rome．条条大路通罗马。

(3)lead sb．to／into／across／through领某人到／进入／越过／穿过……

eg：He led us to the room upstairs．他领我们到了楼上的那个房间。

I led the blind man across the street．我领那个盲人越过街道。

【拓展】

lead a quiet(happy／hard)life过着安静(快乐，艰苦)的生活

give sb．1ead给某人做榜样

take the lead in…在……方面领先

hold／lose the lead保持／失去领先地位

11 The way we view learning and knowledge is also changing．我们看待学习和知识的方法也在变化。

(1)we view learning and knowledge作定语修饰the way，可省略that／in which .eg：I like the way(that／in which)／the pop star acted on the stage． 。

(2)in this way用这种方法，手段

in a way在某种程度上，有点

You're correct in a way．从某种程度上看，你是对的。

in no way绝不

12．promise．允诺，答应：

(A)make a promise作出承诺break a promise违背诺言

carry out a promise履行诺言

I made a promise to give him a picture-book．我答应给他一本图画书。

(B)promise sth．，promise sb．sth．结构

eg：I want you to promise me one thing．我想要你答应我一件事。

(C)promise sb．to do sth．或promise that从句

eg：You must promise me to take a good rest．你必须答应我好好休息。

(D)promise作为不及物动词有“有……的希望，预示……”之意。

eg：The clouds promise rain．乌云预示着下雨。

promising adj．有希望的，有前途的eg：

He is a promising young man．他是一个有前途的年轻人。

针对性训练：’

1.Henry______to attend the meeting on time but he still doesn't turn up．

A．would promise B．has promised

C．promised D．had promised

2.Careless driving____an accident in the future．

A．permits B．shows

C．promises D．means

13．require要求，命令。

(A) require sth．of sb．

(B) require sb．to do

(C)quire that从句(句中用should+ do，should可省略)

eg：All the members are required to attend the meeting．

The court required that he(should)pay the fine．法庭要求他支付罚金。

【警示】require需要；可加名词／代词；require +doing..=require + to be done..，这时动名词是主动形式，但含有被动意义.此时句子主语必须为事或物

eg：This wall requires repairing=This wall requires to be repaired．

requirement，z．要求eg：meet one's requirements符合某人的要求

【拓展】demand，request，require这三个动词都有“要求；需要”之意，但其含义和结构有所有同。

(1) demand主语是人时表示坚决要求，坚持要做某事；主语是物时指迫切需要，其后可接名词、代词、动词不定式或从句，从句用虚拟语气，即谓语用should加动词原形。

eg：He demands to see you．他要求见到你。

She demands a meeting tonight．她要求今天晚上开会。

I demand that one of you(should)go there at once．我要求你们中的一个人马上去那儿。

(2) request意为“恳求；请求”，指通过正式手续提出的要求，口气和缓，态度礼貌。其句型有request sth．(from／of sb．)，request sb．to do sth．和request that从句，从句用虚拟语气

eg：All I request of you is that you should come on time．

我所要求的是你按时来。

Mr Smith requested that his daughter(should)leave here．

史密斯请求他女儿离开这里。

(3)require表示按照法规，权利提出的要求或命令、，指客观需要，含缺此不可之意。其句型有require sth．；require(of)sb．to do sth．；require that从句(从句用虚拟语气)，require doing(主动表被动)和require to be done ：

1．This radio doesn't work．It requires______

A．repairing B．repaired

C．being repaired D．to repair

2．My mother demanded that I____smoking．

A．gave up B．gives up

C．to give D．give up

14．for the first time，the first time

(1)for the first time第一次，初次(介词短语：在句中作状语)

eg：Tom heard of such a thing for the first time in his life．

(2)the first time．．．第一次……时(用于引导时间状语从句)

eg：I remembered John the first time I saw him．

(2) It is／was the first(second．．．)time that…(that引导的定语从句，从句中用现在完成时或过去完成时)

eg：This is the first time that I have been abroad．

15.This company promises that consumers who have been cheated by it can get twice their money cheek．这家公司保证被它欺骗的消费者可以得回两倍的钱。倍数表达法：

(1)…倍数+the size(weight／height／width／length．．．)of+…

eg：That house being built there is 3 times the height of this old one．

正在被修建的那个房是这所旧房的三倍。

The desk is 4 times the length of the box．这张课桌的长度是个那盒子的四倍。

(2)…倍数+比较级+that+…

eg：The number of students in their school is three times larger than that in ours．他们学校学生数量比我们学校多三倍。

(3)…倍数+as +adj／adv．(原级)+as+…

eg：Asia is 4 times as large as Europe．亚洲是欧洲的四倍大。

(4)…倍数+as+many+n．(可数名词复数)+as...

eg：We got 3 times as many people as we had planned．我们买的书是我们原先 计划的3倍之多。

(5)…倍数+as+much+n．(不可数名词)+as…

eg：The book cost me 3 times as much money as the one I bought in Beijing last year．这本书的价钱是我去年在北京买的那本的3倍之多。

重难点针对性训练：

Americans eat ______vegetables per person today as they did in 1910．

A．more than twice B．as twice as many

C．twice as many as D．more than twice as many

16．Company n．

(1)友谊，交情，陪伴[U]

eg：We will be glad of your company 0n the journey．旅行中有你陪伴我们会很高兴。

(A) in company(with)陪伴某人，和……在一起

(B) keep sb．company=keep company with sb．

陪伴某人，和……在一起

He kept me company．他陪伴我。

(2)伴侣，同伴[U]

eg：I have company this evening．今晚我有客。

公司[c]eg：We organized a publishing company．

【拓展】

part company(with)和某人分手，断绝来往

in the company of在……陪同下

17．recognize．

(1)认出；认识，识出，辨出，(能)认出

eg：Do you recognize his handwriting?你能认出他的笔迹吗?

(2)承认(事实)，认清，确认

eg：They refused to recognize a new government．他们拒绝承认新政府。

【拓展】

① recognize as…认出是……

eg：The tune was recognized as the one from the musical．

那首曲子被听出是取自音乐喜剧。

② recognize．．as承认是……

eg：We aU recognized him as a famous writer．

③ recognize sb．to do承认……

eg： They recognized him to be a great leader．

他们承认他是伟大的领袖。

④ be recognized as被承认是，被看作是

eg：He wasn't recognized as a great writer until after his death．

直到他死后才被看作是一位伟大的作家。

【警示】recognize为非延续性动词，不能与表一段时间状语连用。

比较recognize，know，realize．meet

①recognize辨认出，通常指原来熟悉，认识，经过一段时间的间隔或别的原因后，现在重新认出，是瞬间动词，不能用完成时态，不跟时间段，且不能与again连用。

eg：I didn't recognize you just now．刚才我没有认出你。

②know知道，熟悉，了解，延续性动词，指对某人、物非常熟悉或了解较多。

eg：We didn’t know what to do next．我们不知道下一步该做什么。

③realize思想、意识上认识到

eg：He realized that he was wrong．他意识到自己错了。

④meet指初次相识或被介绍认识某人eg：I'm glad to meet you．认识你很高兴。

18.clean up

(1)彻底扫除；清理

eg：It's your turn t0 clean the kitchen up．轮到你打扫厨房啦。

(2)发大财，赚(一大笔钱)eg：He cleaned up a fortune playing cards．他玩牌捞了不少钱。

19．This may sound absurd to you，but if you think about it a little，it may not seem so strange after a11．这可能听起来很滑稽，但如果你再想一想，它可能就不那么奇怪了。

after all

(1)“毕竟”，置于句首，提示或强调可能被人忽视的事实或论点，作为说服对方的理由 eg：Don't be afraid after alI，no one can recognize you here．别害怕，毕竟这儿没人能认出你。

(2)after aIl还可作“终究，终归，到底”讲，置于句末，表示语气上的转折：

I was tired and walked more slowly，but got home after a11．

我很累，走得更慢，但终归还是到家了。

19．Major adj．主要的；重大的；较大的；严重的

n． 主修课程；主修……的学生；少校

v. 主修；专攻(后接介词in)

His major feld is economics．他的主要研究方向是经济学。

He majored in English．他主修英语专业。

=His major is English．

=He is an English major．

The scientific exploration team was 1ed by t11e

A．major B．main C．chief D．most (C)

20．develop n发展；形成；发育；染上；冲洗

He developed aJl interest in collecting stamps．

Can these 6lms be developed by tomorrow noon?

We should try to develop the western part 0f our country．

Plants develop from seeds．

-Why do these photos look so_______?

-The film was not______in the right way．

A．black：washed B．dark；developed

C．bad：printed D．wrong；worked

[解析]wash指水洗，而胶片要用药水显影；照片黑并不是指颜色黑，而是曝光不足。 [答案]B

21, reform vt,n.改革；改良；悔改

与reform相关的一些术语有：

the reform and open policy 改革开放政策

democratic reforms 民主改革

land reform 土地改革

reform oneself 改过自新

22,goods n .商品。货物. goods无单数形式，不能用数词或many等来修饰；作主语时，配用复数动词

There are lots 0f good goods in the supermarket．

Look! There___only___goods on the shelf.

A．is；two pieces of B．is；two piece of

C．are；two pieces of D．are；two piece of

[解析] 综观考题及选项，可知本题着重考察goods作主语时与之搭配的谓语形式。由左边解释知，谓语应用复数，排除A、B两项，又“two”与“pieces“搭配，排除D项，two pieces 0f goods两件货物。[答案] c

23. purchase，n.购买。购置物. Vt,购买

It's really a good purehase!

I have some purehases to make in town．

It was the most extravagant purchase I have ever made．

24, regular.adj.有规律的，定期的,习惯性的,除以上常用义外，regular还有以下意思：

regular teeth整齐的牙齿(整齐的，匀称的)

a regular member正式会员(正规的，公正的)

a regular hero真英雄(十足的，彻底的)

a regular customer老顾客(定期的，经常的)

[考题]she arrives every day at five,_______. (C )

A．how good she is B．it is surprised

C．regular as clockwork D．that's nice

[解析]乍一看本题，A、B、D三项，意思均可知，但c项似乎未见过，显然A、B、D三项均与题干不符，若用排除法，即可快速得到本题答C，所以平时解题掌握一定的技巧是很有必要的。(as)regular as clockwork“极有规律的”.

25, distance n．远处。远方。距离

A good cyclist can cover distances of over a hundred miles a day．The beach is within walking distance of my house，It’s near enough to be reached easily on foot． He won't hit the target at that distance．

考题He was asked many times to join the party'but he always

_____________.

A．went the distance C．kept his distance

B．in the distance D．keep him at a distance

【解析】 “g0 the distance'’意为继续跑完全程，赛足全局等；“in the distance”在……距离内；keep one’s distance保持一定距离，对(人，事业)等冷淡，疏远；keep sb．at a distance与某人保持一定的距离，不愿与某人亲近，A、B两项均不合句意，D项虽符合题意，但时态错误，故选C项。句意为：“人家好几次要他参加那个政党，但他的反应总是很冷漠。” [答案]C

26．Cheat vt .欺骗。骗取

n. 欺骗行为

Keep away from that man!He is always cheating others．

They cheated death in the stormy sea．

他们从狂风暴雨的大海中死里逃生。

As a student,we shouldn’t cheat at the examination．

作为一个学生，我们不应在考试中作弊。

[考题](1) That man is really bad!He_____her wife，he not only always shouts t0 her but a1so fights with her,

A．beat B．is in love with

C．cheats him 0f D．cheats on

[解析]根据句意知，那个“男人”并不爱他的妻子，排除B，句末已明确表明他经常打他的妻子，若选A项则重复，而cheat sb．(out)0fsth．是防止某人得到某事物(尤指以不正当或不诚实的手段)，而cheat(on)sb．意为“不忠实于…”。[答案] D

(2)Jim’s father was accused 0f____at cards，but in fact not．

A．good B．playing C．cheating D．winning

[解析] 固定搭配：accuse sb．0f cheating at cards指责某人玩牌时作弊。[答案] c

27．combine with sth ．同……联合起来

combine A with(and)B把A与B联合起来

Bad planning，combined with bad luck，led t0 the company's collapse．计划不周。加上运气不好，导致这家公司倒闭。

[考题] Nowhere in nature is aluminum(铝)found free，owing t0 its always____with other elements，most commonly with oxygen．

A．combined B．having combined

C．tombine D．being combined

[解析]owing t0介词短语，后接动名词短语作宾语，combine与名词aluminum是被动关系，故用动名词的被动形式。being combined表示“正在被联合”，显然本题无此语境。C、D两项因为是主动形式，也不符合本题语态要求。 [答案]A

28．Appreciate. Vt. 欣赏；理解体会；感激感谢；升值．增值(后接名词、代词,v-ing或从句)

[考题]

As I'll be away for at least a year，I’d applociate

______from you now and then telling me how everyone is getting along．

A．hearing B．to hear

C．to be hearing D．having heard

[解析]本题考查动词appreciate的用法及动词的时态。preciate(感激)后面用动名词，即-ing形式，所以所给选项中可以排除B、C两项。主句中的now and then(时常)表明本句的动名词应用一般现在时，所以D项可以排除。剩余的一项为惟一正确选项。句意为“由于我要离开至少一年的时能不时地收到你的来信，告诉我各位的情况，我会十分感谢。”[答案]A

29．本单元几个前缀的用法

(1)fore一：作“事先；先前”讲。

forecast--预报，foretell一预知，forefather--祖先

(2)re一：作“又、再、重新”讲。

reform--改革，retell一复述，rebuild-重建

(3)en一：作“使……”讲。

ensure一确信，enrich一变富，enlarge一扩大

本单元几个后缀的用法

(1)一ly：作“……地”讲，一般用作副词后缀，也可用作形容词后缀。

regularly一定期地，hardly--几乎不，lovely一可爱的

(2)一or：作“……人，……者，……家”讲，一般指人。

educator---教育家，visitor---游客，inventor---发明家

(3)一(i)ty：无特殊含义。

Reality n现实，ability n 能力，possibility .n 可能性

30．含介词to的常用词组

get down to开始认真做某 pay attention to注意

1ook forward to盼望 refer to涉及；所指 。

belong to 属于 compare..to把……比作…… ．

be used to习惯于 devote to奉献

turn to 转向 be／get close to接近，靠近

stick to 坚持 add to增加

31．tiny、little与small的区别

small小，不带任何感情成分；

little小而可爱的；tiny极小的。

There is a small quantity of milk left in the cup．

Babies have very tiny=(small)fingers．

婴儿的手指很小。

a little problem(1ittle=not important)

32．“v+n+of+sth．”的词组小结

cure sb．of sth．治疗好某人的病

warn sb．of sth．警告某人某事

inferm sb．of sth．通知某人某事

rob sb．of sth．抢劫某人某物

remind sb．of sth．提醒某人某事

33．含all的词组小结

after all毕竟；究竟；到底

above all最重要的是；特别是

first of all首先，第一(：first)

in all总共；总计

at all根本(不)(多用于否定句中)

all in all总的说来；总共

all at once突然；一下子

34．含(in )touch(with)的词组小结

keep in touch(with)与……保持联系

get in touch with和……取得联系

lose touch with和……失去联系

be in touch(with)和……有联系

be／get out of touch(with)失去联系；脱离

bring…into／in touch with使接触：使认识

35．“in+名词”的词组小结

in hospital在住院 in prison在监狱(服刑)

in battle在战斗中 in order井然有序

in danger在危险中 in doubt感到怀疑

in common共有 in debt负债

in sight在视线之内 in trouble处于不幸(苦恼或困境)中

in store储藏着；准备着 in general大体上(=generally)

in peace意为“平平安安地”(peacefully) in secret秘密地(=secretly)

in surprise惊奇地(=surprisedly) in public公开地(=publicly)

in person亲自(=personally) in particular特别地(=particularly)

in place在适当的位置；在通常的位置 in silent无声地(=silently)

36．含air的词组小结

an air of sth．神态，气质，气氛，……的样子

in the air酝酿中

in the open air=outside在户外

on(the)air广播中 by air乘飞机

37.语法讲解

名词性从句(二)： 主语从句

1． 常用来引导主语从句的有从属连词that，whether；连接代词who，what，which；副词when，where，how，why等。

eg：Whether she's coming or not doesn't matter very much．

她是否会来并不十 分要紧。

What seems to be good to eat is often bad for people's health．

那些好像很好吃的东西常常对人们的健康有害。

When we're going to Bejing is not decided yet．

我们何时去北京尚未决定。

2． 为了使句子结构平衡，常用it作形式主语，而将主语从句后置。

eg：It remains a secret how this boy climbed up the hill．

这个男孩是如何上山的仍是个谜。

It's not been decided when the project will be started．

3．“形式主语It+单数谓语动词+其他+主语从句”结构在口语中常可省略连词that。

It's a pity(that)they missed the early bus to Shanghai．

It seems unlikely(that)she will refuse the offer．

4．如果含有主语从句的复合句是疑问句，一般要用带形式主语it的句型；但．what，whatever或whoever引导的主语从句一般不用于带形式主语的句型，即使在疑问句中亦如此。

eg：Has it been decided where we'll have the party?

Is what you told me last night really true?

5．It is said that．…It is believed that…等句式是固定用法，其中的主语从句不可置于句首。

6．引导名词性从句的that和what．．

that引导主从，宾从，表从时在句中无词义，只起连接作用。引导宾语从句时，that可省略；引导主语从句时常用形式主语it代替主语从句。what引导主语从句、宾语从句、表语从句时，不但起连接作用，而且有具体意义，意为“the thing(s)that(which)所 ……的人(物)”。简言之，从句中如果主语和表语或宾语都不缺少时，连接词用that，否则用what。

eg：The fact is that we are far behind the developed countries in science and technology．The village is no longer what it used to be ten years ago．

语法针对性训练：

1．______tells the truth will be praised in the newspaper．

A．The person B．Anyone

C．Whoever D．Who

2．_____ we can't get seems better than____we have．

A．What；what B．What；that

C．That；that D．That；what

3．It made him miss the train___she got up very late

A．what B．for

C．that D．if

同位语从句.

①常见的标志词有idea，belief，doubt，fact，hope，

news，possibility，tought，promise，advise，suggest，

proposal，demand，request，wish，word，message。

information，truth，case，problem，question，etc．

The idea that computers can recognize human voices surprises many people．

计算机可以识别人的声音，这种想法使许多人感到惊奇。

We must remember the fact that goats usually 1ive in mountainous country． 我们得记住山羊总是生活在山区这一事实。

② how,when,where,why 等也可引导同位语从句，在从句中作成份。只说明内容。

Eg.I have no idea when he will be back.

[考题] (1)The news___ our team had won 150 gold metals excited us．

A．that B．which C．what D．when

(2)Thee news___he to1d us excited all 0f us．

A．that B．which C．what D．when

[解析]本句考查同位语从句与定语从句的区别。同位语从句

用来说明前面标志词的内容，that在同位语从句中不作任何成分，但不可省略；而定语从句用来限制或修饰前面的先行词，that在定语从句中作宾语时在非正式文体和口语中可省略。由此可知，第(1)句是个同位语从句，第(2)句是个定语从句，what不引导定语从句，when表时间．两题均无此语境。 [答案] (1)A(2)B

(3)we’11 go camping tomorrow depends on the weather．

A．If B．Whether C．That D．Where (B )

练习题：

1．The faces of four famous American presidents on Mount Rushmore can be seen from a____of 60 miles．

A．1ength B．distance C．way D．space

2.People may have different opinions about Karen，but I admire her．____，she is a great musician．

A．After all B．As a result

C．In other words D．As usual

3.I’d 1ike to buy a house-modern,comfortable，and___in a quiet neighborhood．

A．in all B．above all C．after all D．at all

4.There’s _____cooking oil lef in the house．Would you g0 to the corner store and get___?

A．little；some B．1ittle；any

C．a little；some D．a little；any

5．After Yang Liwei succeeded in circling the earth，____our astronauts desire to do is walk in space．

A．where B．what C．mat D．how

6．Chinese arts has won the_____ of a 1ot 0f people outside China．

A．enjoyment B．alppreciation

C．entertainment D．reputation

7．A story goes_____ Elizabeth I of Endand liked nothing more than being surreunded by clever and qualified noblemen at court．

A．when B．where C．what D．that

8．The pilot asked all the passengers 0n board to remain___as the p1ane was making a landing．

A．seat B．seating

C．seated D．to be seating

9．It was foolish of him to_____his notes during that important test，and as a result，he got punished．

A．stick to B．refer to C．keep to D．point to

10．Having a trip abroad is certainly good for the o1d couple，but it remains______whether they’ll enjoy it．

A．to see B．to be seen C．seeing D．seen

11.A1ong the letter was his promise____he would visit me this corning Christmas．

A．which B．that C．what D．whether

12．It is pretty well understood____contrals the flow of carbon dioxide in and out 0f the atmosphere today．

A．that B．when C．what D．how

13．_______made the school proud was___more than 90％0f the students had been admitted t0 key universities．

A．What；because B．What；that

C．That：what D.That；because

14.There is a new problem involved in the popularity of private cars______road conditions need_________．

A．that；to be improved B．which：t0 be improved

C．where；improving D．when；improving

15.______fashion differs from country t0 country may reflect the cultural differences from one aspect．

A．What B．That C．This D．Which

16.To regain their_____after all exhausting game，the players lay in the grass．

A．force B．energy C．power D．health

17． Shipton believed that they were not____the tracks of a monkey or bear and felt the Abominable Snowman might really existed．

A．entirely B．naturally C．clearly D．simply

18．Information has been put forward_____more middle schoo1 graduates will be admitted into universities．

A．while B．that C．when D．as

19．____is no possibility_______Bob Can win the first prize in the match．

A．There；that B．It；what

C．There；whether D．It；whether

20．_______ she couldn’t understand was fewer and fewer students showed interest in her lessons．

A．What：why B．That；what

C．What；because D．Why；that

21．_______ has helped to save the drowning girl is worth praising．

A．Who B．The one C．Anyone D．Whoever

答 案

(1) [解析] a 1ength of表示“……的长度”，a way of表示“……的方法”，a space of表示“一段……空地”，故这三者均不符合句意：从一个……远的距离。 [答案] B

(2)[解析] 从but与great可以看出，我承认“毕竟”Karen是个优秀的音乐家。 [答案]A

(3)[解析] 所买的房子，一要现代化，二要舒服，但“最重要的是(above a11)”要有一个安静的环境。[答案]B

(4)[解析] 本题考查代词用法。lime表否定含义，a lime表肯定含义。从句意可判断出家里没有多少油了。故排除C、D两项，后一个空中，some用于疑问句表示委婉的语气。用以提出请求。 [答案]A

(5) [解析] 此题句子为时间状语从句，全主句的主语是由主语从句来充当的，并且主语从句中不定式动词do缺少宾语故选what。[答案] B

(6)[解析]enjoyment表示“享受”，entertainment表示“娱乐”，reputation表示“声望”，均不符合句意所体现的“中国艺术赢得了无数海外人的喜爱／欣赏” [答案] B

(7)[解析] 此题考查同位语从句。that引导句子做a story的同位语，同位语较长，放在句子谓语后 [答案]D

(8)[解析] “就座”的表达之一是be seated，当它用作表语时，只需用过去分词即可，此处remain作连系动词用，构成系表结构，表示“保持就坐的姿势不变”。[答案] C

(9)[解析] 句意表示，她在考试时“偷看了／参考了”笔记本，这是不对的。[答案] B

(10)[解析] 此题测试remain的用法，因为后果还未出现，所以用remain t0 be seen表示“有待观察／弄明白”。[答案] B

(11)[解析] “标志词”promise暗示要使用同位语从句，并且后面的“他 要来看我”就是“诺言”的内容，所以本题考查了同位语从句。[答案]B

(12)[解析】 what引导主语从句，且在句中作主语。tIlat引导主语从句时 不作任何成分；when表示时间，在主语从句中作状语；how表示方式，也作状语。 [答案]C

(13)[解析] 第一空引导词引导主语从句且作主语，只有what；表语从句中因为表述的是事实，所以由只起连接词作用的that引导 [答案]B

(14)[解析] that引导同位语从句具体说明“新问题”的内容。need后既可接动名词，也可接动词不定式的被动式表示被动。 [答案]A

(15)[解析] 分析题意可知，“时髦因国家不同而不同”表述的是事实，所以要用引导词that引导表语从句。 [答案] B

(16)[解析] force多指“力量；武力”，power多指“权力，权 势”，health指“健康”，三者均与题目中选手们为了恢复“体 力、精力”不符。 [答案] B ．

(17)[解析] entirely表示“完全地”，naturally表示“自然地”，clearly表示“清楚地”，而从原文中的下文Shipton认为雪人可能真的存在可知，这些脚印不仅仅是猴子与熊之类的。 [答案] D

(18)[解析]从标志词information及后面的内容即是解释说明ireformation的内容可知，本句是一个同位语从句。 [答案] B

(19)[解析】 第一空表达“存在”的含义，用，I'}lere be句型；从句子结构和意义两方面分析可知，第二空需要引导词引导同位语从句。因为no possibilily已表达了明确的意义，所以用表示确定意义的引导词that。 [答案] A

(20)[解析] 主语从句中的understand缺少宾语，所以第一空要由what 引导。第二空中，既然不理解，必然是有疑问的东西，所以应由why引导。 [答案]A

(21)[解析] whoever引导主语从句表示强调某人；who虽然也可以引导主语从句，但表示强调某事。me one和anyone均不能引导主语从句。

[答案] D

Unit 6 知识与能力同步测控题

(满分120分；时间100分钟)

一、单项填空(共15小题；每小题1分。满分15分)

从A、B、c、D四个选项中，选出可以填人空白处的最佳选项。

1．It is your own fault______you are so tired．You oughtn’t to have stayed up so late．

A．when B．how C．where D．why

2．_____ is obviously right is to give all children equal opprtunities to develop their special gift．

A．As B．That C．Which D．What

3．_____sometimes keeps her awake at night is____Tom is getting more and more quiet at home．

A．That；which B．It；that

C．Whether；what D．What：that

4．A normal young child gains great pleasure when___he does pleases her mother.

A．that B．if C．as D．what

5．It is said that the famous football star is now willing to play for ______would pay him three million dollars a year．

A．anyone B．whomever

C．no matter who D．whoever

6．I don't think Kate is too young to take care of the pet dog____.

A．properly B．correctly

C．exacitly D．actively

7．____really matter that she wore a pair of white shoes．

A．It B．As C．Which D．What

8．_____lies east of China is known to us a11．

A．Japan B．That Japan

C．As Japan D．Why Japan

9．一I suppose a11 the students went t0 the museum this afternoon．

-I’m afraid not．They___went to the net bar instead．

A．almost B．nearly

C．mostly D．most

10．The only season that makes one feel___is the Spring．

A．1ively B．1iving

C．1ive D．1ovely

1 1．The man replied in____accented English that he preferred

a non-smoking section．

A．badly B．heavily

C．seriously D．violently

12．Many countries are increasing their use of natural gas，wind and other forms of____．

A．energy B．source C．power D．material

13．-I’m sorry I didn’t do a good job．

一Never mind．_____you have tried your best．

A.Above all C．At all

B．In all D．After all

14．Now that there are only a few minutes left，we’d better talk about the plan in ________．

A．short B．secret C．all D．general

15．一Do you play football after work?

一Yes，only once in a while，not_____．You know，it is not my favourite sport．

A．regularly B．timely

C．ordinarily D．necessarily

二、完形填空(共20小题；每小题1．5分。满分30分)

阅读下面短文，掌握其大意，然后从16～35各题所给的四个选项(A、B、C、D)中，选出最佳选项。

Many of the World’s pollution problems have been caused bythe crowding of large groups of people into the cities．To supplyfor the needs of the people 16 further pollution by industry．

17 the rapid increase in human population 18 at the present rate，there may be 19 greater harm．Some scientists speak of the increase in numbers of people 20 “population pollution'’．About 2，000 years ago，the world population was probablyabout 250 million．It 21 a billion in 1850．By 1930 the population was two billion.It is now over 22 billion.It 23 to double by the year 2,000．If the population continues t0 grow at the same rate，there 24 twenty-five billion people in the world a hundred years 25 now．

Man 26 the earth’s resources 27 rapidly over the years． Some of them are almost 28 ． Now many people believe that man's greatest problem is 29 the growth 0f his own population．The materials in the world 30 support me growth in human population．31 to come，if the present rate 0f increase continues． Already 32 overcrowding in the cities and 33 in some countries．34 the rate 0f population growth continue?Many people believe the human survival in the future 35 on this question．

16．A．1ad t0 B．1eads to C．1ead D．1eads

17．A．Whether B．If C．Unless D．And

18．A．continues B．will continue

C．continue D．are going t0 continue

19．A．many B．much C．very D．most

20．A．1ike B．to C．as D．for

21．A．reached B．got C．arrived D．went

22．A．three a half B．three and half

C．three and a half D．half and three

23．A．is expected B．expects

C．will expect D．can be expecting

24．A．will have B．will 1ive

C．would be D．can be expecting

25．A．bv B．from C．at D．to

26．A．have been using B．has been using

C．have used up D．has used up

27．A．more and more B．more or less

C．1ittle by 1ittle D．sooner or later

28．A．going B．be going

C．has gone D．gone

29．A．how to increase B．raising

C．how to control D．to decrease

30．A．will B．will not

C．does not D．may

31．A．at time B．in time

C．in no time D．for a time

32．A．this is B．that is

C．where there is D．there is

33．A．hungry B．hunger

C．hungrily D．hungers

34．A．Can B．Must

C．Need D．Dare

35．A．goes B．pushes

C．puts D．depends

三、阅读理解(共20小题；每小题2分，满分40分)

阅读下列短文，从每题所给的四个选项(A、B、c、D)中选出最佳选项。

A

Can you imagine what our life will be like in the year 2050?

Perhaps you will be flying off for a holiday on the moon，or maybe You will be taking your dog for a walk in virtual(虚拟)realily．

we recently carried out a survey(调查)0f 1，000 people from different countries to find out what they think life will be like in the future．The results clearly show both our hopes and fears．

The survey suggests that friendship--one of the most important human relationships-will have changed dramatically(显著)．People will make friends mainly through the Internet．What is more，a large number 0f people will come across their future spouses(配偶)in this way!computers will have become completely necessary by 2050．Even now，some people begin to regard them as their best friends. 0thers，however，say that we will become much more separated and estranged(疏远的)from each other because we will have little real human contact．

Edueation will have changed a 1ot，too．As more and more children will be using tomputers in schools，certain abilities，such as memtal arithmetic(心算)，won't be necessary since there will be computer programs for most calculations(计算)．Eyen writing by hand-at least to some extent--will have become a thing of the past．

According to the survey，home life will be more and more comfortable．Most people believe that by 2050 robots will be doing housework and we will rely mainly on ready-made food．A lot of people think that we might only cook for fun in the future．

Space exploration(探险)will become increasingly popular．Fifty percent of the people we talked to believe that man will regularly visit Mars．They also believe that travel on our own planet will probably change．Almost everyone thinks that there will be no cars in the city center． Some even think that environmentally-friendly

(利于环保的)electric or solar-powered cars will have replaced the cars we use now．

Pollution is something that worries us very much．Some fear that it will continue to get worse，and that it will be impossible for us to live on our polluted planet．0thers even foresee(预言)that one day we’ll have to pay for clean air．

On the other hand，people seem to be quite optimistic about the benefits of genetic(遗传)engineering，as they think scientists will use it to cure diseases like cancers and AIDS．If scientists manage to find a cure for these，we'll have a much healthier society．

Some people worry about the future，while others are full of hope and confidence(信心)．No matter how dark or bright it may seem，it is up to us to look after our planet and try to make it a better globe to live on．

36．Many people believe that in 2050，we will_____．

A．not pay for computers

B．seldom leave our homes

C．not have any real friends

D．find partners and friends mainly through computers

37．The passage suggests that in 2050_____．

A．half of the World population will have traveled to Mars

B．students will write with typewriters only

c．Cooking will not be easy to people

D：lessons taught at school and the ways in which they are taught will be very different

38．Some people beljeve that pollution will have_____by 2050．

A．disappeared

B．killed most of the people on the planet

C．become an even worse problem

D．made our planet a warmer place to live on

39．Many people think that by 2050______．

A．there will be a cure for cancer and AIDS

B．people will have stopped dying

C．Scientists will solve all the problems we face.

D．people won’t get diseases

40．The undeflinedword“optimistic'most probably means____in Chinese．

A．悲观的 B．乐观的

C．好笑的 D．担忧的

B

Here are two cars tHat may some day take the place of today's big automobiles(汽车)．If everyone drives such a car in the future there will be 1ess pollution in the air．There will also be more parking(停放车辆)space in cities，and strees will be less crowded．Three such cars fit in the space now needed for one car of the usual size．

The little cars will cost much less to own and to drive．Driving will be safer，too，as these little cars csn go only 65 kilometers per hour．

The cars 0f the future will be fine for getting around a cicy，but they will not be useful f0r long trips．If the car is powered by electricity．it will have two batteries(电池)--one battery for the motor and one for the horn(喇叭)，the signals(信号灯)，etc．Little cars which are powered by gasoline(汽油)will go 450 kilometers before needing to stop for more gasoline．

If big cars are still used along with the small ones，two sets of roads will be needed in the future．Some roads will be used for the big，fast cars，and other roads will be needed for the smaller，slower ones．

41．What is the advantage of the small cars?

A.There won't be so much pollution and the small cars won't

be so expensive as the big ones．

B．It wiIl be safer to drive these small cars．

C．There will be more space for cars to park．

D．All the abeve．

42．Why is it safer to drive these small cars?

A．Because the speed of these cars is unlimited．

B．Because the speed of these cars is limited．

C．Because the streets won't be so crowded．

D．Beeause the cars need only a 1ittle space．

43．What are the two cars referred to in the passage?

A．One which is good for getting round a city and one which

is not useful for long trips．

B．One which is powered by electricity and one which is powered by gasoline．

C．One which is powered by electricity and one which is powered by sunlight．

D．One which costs less and one which runs slowly．

44．Two sets of roads are necessary in the future in order to___.

A．prevent road accidents

B．make the city more beantiful

C．1et small cars run faster

D．1imit the speed of cars

45．The best title for the passage misht be______.

A．Big Cars and Small Cars

B．How to Drive Small Cars

C．Cars for Tomorrow

D．Cars for Everyone

C

As you move around your home，take a good look at the things yon have.It is 1ikely that your living room will have a television set and a video，and your kitchen a washing machine and a microwave oven.Your bedroom drawers will be filled with almost three times as many clothes as you need．Yon almost certainly own a car and possibly a home computer，holiday abroad at 1east once a year and eat out at least once a week．

Now，perhaps，more than ever before，people are wondering what life is a11 about，and what it is for．Seeking material success is beginning to trouble large numbers of people around the world．They feel that the 1ong-hours work culture to make more to buy more things is eating up their lives，leaving them very little time or energy for family or pastimes．Many are turning t0 other ways of living and downshifting is one of them．

Six percent of workers in Britain took the decision to downshift last year．One couple who downshifted is Daniel and Liz．They used to werk in central London．He was a newspapor reporter and she used to work for an international bank．They would go to work by train every day from their large house in the suburbs(效区)leaving their two children wwith a nanny(保姆)．Most evenings Dalliel wouldn't get home untill eight or nine o'clock．and nearly twice a month he would have to fly to New York for meetings．They both earned a large amount of money but began to feel that life was passing them by．

Nowadays．they run a farm in the mountains of Wales．“I always wanted to have a farm here。”says Daniel，“and we took almost a year to make the decision to downshift．It’s taken some getting used to，but it’s been worth it．We have to think twice now about spending money on car repairs and we no 1onger have any holidays．However．I think it’s made us stronger as a family ,and the children are a lot happier．”

Liz．however，is not quite sure，“I used to enjoy my job，even though it was hard work and long hours．I’m not really a country girl，but I suppose I’m gradually getting used to 1ooking after the animals．0ne thing I do like，though，is being able to see more of my children．My advice for other people wanting to do the same is not to think about it too mach or you might not do it a11．”

46．What do the first two paragraphs tell us?

A．People seldom work 1ong hours to make money．

B．People hardly buy more things than necessary

C．People are sure everything they own is in the right place．

D．PeoDle realise there is more to life than just making money.

47．When Daniel was a reporter he_____

A．1ived in central London

B．disliked his job

C．missed his children

D．was well paid

48．Daniel and Liz both agree that the move to the farm_____．

A．was easy to organise

B．has improved family life

C．was extremely expensive

D．has been a total success

49．What does the underlined“it”in the last paragraph refer to?

A．Child-caring． B．Liz's advice．

C．Downshifting． D．Liz’s job．

50．The underlined word “downshming”in the second paragraph

A．repairing your car by yourse1f

B．spending more money carefully

C．moving out to the countryside to live a simpler and better Life.

D．1iving in a big house in the suburbs and dining out once a week

D

What will man be like in the future-in 5000 or even 50，000 years from now“?We can only make guesses，of course，but we can be sure that he will be different from what he is today,for mall is slowly changing all the time．

Let us take an obvious example．Man．even five hundred years ago，was shorter than he is today．Now，on average，men are about three inches taller．Five hundred years is a relativelv short period of time，so we may assume that man will continue to grow taller．Again，in the modem world we use our brains a great deal．Even so，we still make use of only about 20％of the brain's capacity．As time goes on，however，we shall have to use our brains more and more，and eventually we shall need larger ones ! This is is likely to bring about a physical change too；the head，in particular the forehead，will grow larger．

Nowadays our eyes are in constant use．In fact。We use them so much that very often they become weaker and we have to wear glasses．But over a very long period of time it is likely that man’s eyes will grow stronger．

On the other hand。we tend to make less use of our arms and legs．These，as a result，are 1ikely to grow weaker．At tlhe same time，however，our fingers will grow more sensitive because they are used a great deal in modern life．

But what about hair?’This will probably disappear from the body altogether in course of time because it does not serve a useful purpose any longer．In the future，then，both sexes are likely tobe bald．

Perhaps all this gives the impression that future man will not be a very attractive creature to 1ook at!This may well be true．All the same，in spite of all these changes，future man will still have a lot in common with us．He will still be a human being，with thoughts and emotions similar to our own． -

51．The passage mainly tells us that--．

A．man’s life will be different in the future .

B．future man will 1ook quite different from us

C．man is growing taller and uglier as time passes

D．human’s organs’functions will become weak

52．What serves as the evidence that man is changing?

A．Man has got stronger eyes now than he ever had．

B．Man’s hair is gretting thinner and thinner．

C．Man’s arms and legs have become lighter and weaker．

D．Man has been growing taller over the past 500 years．

53．The change in man’s size of forehead will probably be because____.

A．he makes use only 20％of the brain's capacity

B．his brain has grown larger over the past centuries

C．the other 80％of his brain will grow in due time

D．he¨will use his brain more and more as time goes on

54．What will be true about a human being in the future?

A．He will be hairless because hair is no lonlger useful．

B．He will have smaller eyes and will wear better dasses．

C．His fingers will grow weaker beoause he won’t have to make

use of them．

D．He will think and feel in a different way．

55．It is implied that--．

A．human beings will become less attractive in the future ．

B．1ess use of a bodily organ may lead to its degeneration

C．human beings hope for a change in the future life

D．future life is always predietable

四、短文改错(共10小题；每小题1分，满分10分)

Michael was walking along the street other 56_________．

day．Then he felt someone shouting his name． 57_________．

He stopped and 1ooked around．He was Jack 58_________．

Events who were running after him．Michael and 59_________．

Jack went to the same school and then to the 60_________．

same university．So they hadn’t met each other 61_________．

since then．they decided to have the lunch together．62________．

They went to the nearest restaurant and sat by the 63_______．

table near the window．Then they talked about that 64_______．

they had done since they graduated a university． 65_______．

五、书面表达(满分25分)

假如你叫李明，你的澳大利亚朋友Jim来信想了解有关北京为迎接奥运会而进行的城市美化工作的情况。请你根据下表内容，用英语写一封回信，并欢迎他居时能来北京玩。

口号 绿色奥运

计划投资 122亿美元

环境 大面积植树、种草、栽花

美化内容 环保 使用清洁能源、处理和再利用污水

目标 花园城市、天再蓝些、水再清些

注意：1．词数100左右；2．生词提示：口号slogan。

篇2：人教新高二教案学案一体化unit5

Unit 5 The British Isles

教学目的和要求

（Teaching aims and demands）

类别 课程标准要求掌握的项目

话题 Talking about the British Isles

词 consist state powerful mistaken narrow republic Europe form Atlantic generalinfluence basis(pl. bases) upper union judge queen cigarette proof own foot(pl.feet) employ sheet grain westwards approach

汇 consist of be made up of make the most of hold together Northern Ireland the AtlanticOcean in general

功能 同意与不同意 (Expressing agreement and disagreement)Don't you think that...? No, you are wrong thinking that...Surely it must be ... I don't think that's right ...I'm afraid you're wrong... Yes, you are right, but...I don't think so. Aren't you confusing ...?Yes, I agree with you. You must be mistaken...I'm not so sure about that ... I believe that you've got it right.

语法 名词性从句(Noun clauses) (1)1.同谓语从句 (Appositive clause)The idea that England stands for Fish & Chips, the Speakers' Corner and the Tower ofLondon is past.2.表语从句 (Predicative clause)The result of so much French influence was that the English language ended up with many French words such as table, animal and age.3.主语从句 (Subject clause)That most of these are now threatened and may disappear is a serious matter to the people in Britain.4.宾语从句 (Object clause)They realize that it is of great value to record and teach them to the younger generation.

LISTENING TEXT：

Good morning and welcome to the Language School at Dublin University. I'm very happy to greet you all to our summer Programme and hope that you will not only learn a lot more English, but also learn about the Irish way of life. Before you go to your classrooms, I want to have a quick look at your weekly timetable with you.Classes are taught from Monday to Friday with four classes in the morning and three classes in the afternoons.One lesson takes up 50 minutes. We start every morning with two lessons of what we call Language Study, which will mostly be grammar and vocabulary. The rest of the morning classes are either spent in the computer lab, or in workshops. There's a Conversation Workshop to practice your speaking skills, one lesson on Tuesday, directly after the Language Study class and there's a Reading Workshop of two times fifty minutes on Friday morning.There are also two fifty minutes classes in the computer lab which form the third class on both Wednesdays and Thursdays.

Lunch is from half past twelve till one o'clock. Each afternoon, except for Wednesday, starts with two lessons of skills practice. In those classes you will mostly practiselistening and speaking. On Monday and Tuesday they are followed by a class of fifty minutes at the language lab.

The language lab is open Monday to Friday from half past eight in the morning until eight o'clock in the evening, while the library is open every day, including the weekends，from eight am till ten pm.

Language Study and the classes in the computer lab are taught by Dave.Cnversation and skills are taught by Flora and Sarah.Reading is by Andrew and the teacher who will be with you in the language lab is Julia.If for some reason you cannot come to class,you have

To phone your teacher half an hour before class begins.

Answers to Exercises 1:

True: 3

Answers to Exercise 2：

TIME MONDAY TUESDAY WEDNESDAY THURSDAY FRIDAY

8:30am10:20am Language Study(Dave) Language Study(Dave) Language Study(Dave) Language Study(Dave) Language Study(Dave)

10:30am1l:20am ConversationWorkshop(Flora & Sarah) Computer lab(Dave) Computer lab(Dave) ReadingWorkshop(Andrew)

ll:30am12:20am ReadingWorkshop(Andrew)

12.30pm Lunch Lunch Lunch Lunch Lunch

l:00pm2:50pm Skills(Flora & Sarah) Skills(Flora & Sarah) Skins(Flora & Sarah) Skills(Flora & Sarah)

3:00pm3:50pm Language lab(Julia) Language lab(Julia)

Answers to Exercise 3:

1．Call Dave half an hour before class begins.

2．In the classes of skills practice the students practicelistening and speaking.

3.Language lab is open on week days/from Mon-day to Friday, from

8:00 am fill 8:00 pm.

LISTENING TEXT:

Wales is one of the four countries that form the United Kingdom. The Act of Union in 1536 combined West and East Wales into a single state. Wales was considered by the English and later Great Britain and the United Kingdom governments as a separate part of England and Cardiff was named in 1955 as its capital. Since then we speak of ”England and Wales“ where before only ”England“ was used. Travelling from England, you will know when you are in Wales, because all street signs and names of railway stations are written in two languages: English and Welsh. Welsh is the original language of the people in Wales.The landscape in Wales is also different from England.While England is mostly hilly, the central parts of Wales are motmtainous. It is here that we find the highest mountainin the UK. As it is impossible to grow crops on the mountains,Welsh farmers keep sheep instead. It is difficult to get around the steep mountain slopes, even in ajeep. So the Welsh sheep farmers use dogs to move the sheep from one field to another.

The weather in Wales is warmer and wetter than in other parts of Britain. This is because of the high mountains.The wind here usually comes from the southwest. As it moves across the warm Atlantic Ocean, the wind carries water from the sea. When this wind hits the mountains of Wales, the air rises causing rain to fall.

Wales is popular with holiday visitors. They go hiking in the mountains, or spend their summer days by the sea, swimming or sailing. People interested in history and architecture can visit some of the many historical sites in Wales. Most ancient castles and churches are open to the public. During the holidays, there are festivals too, with singing and dancing. Wales is often called ”the Land of Song“ and its people are famous for their love of poetry and music.

Answers to Exercise 1:

1．Cardiff

2．Part of England from 1536 until 1955; now one of the fourn countries that form the UK.

3．Mountainous

4．Sea climate; wetter and warmer than the rest of the UK

5．Sheep farming

6．Hiking / swimming / sailing

Visit castles, churches and festivals

Answers to Exercise 2:

1． The landscape is different.Street signs and names of stations

are written in two languages: English and Welsh.

2．To move their sheep from one field to another.

3．Because the wind usually comes from the sea, and when it hits

the mountains it starts raining.

语篇领悟

阅读本单元课文，完成下列各题：

1.1 细枝末节

(Passage 1)

1．According to the passage, what do you know about the Isle

of Man?

A. It lies between Britain and Ireland.

B. It's run over by the king of UK.

C. The king of England is in charge of it.

D. Both A and C.

2． How many spoken languages are considered as native languages

in the British Isles?

A. 2 B. 8 C. 1 D. 6

3．What languages formed the basis for English?

A. Languages spoken by European people.

B. Languages spoken by people from northern Europe.

C. The French language.

D. Gaelic and Irish.

(Passage 2)

4. Sheep are fed .

A. in the centre of Salisbury

B. around the city

C. in and around Salisbury

D. on the tops of hills

5. A traveler may be interested in .

A. the history of the country

B. the Cathedral of Salisbury

C. a place of interest here

D. hundreds of thousands of sheep

6. About Salisbury, which of the following is NOT true?

A. It lies where 3 rivers join together.

B. It is in Southern England.

C. It is a large and fine city.

D. Salisbury is about 3 miles away from Clarendon Park.

1.2 主旨大意

7. What's the main idea of Passage 1?

A. Britain was once in the charge of the Frenchmen.

B. The UK is made up of 3 countries.

C. The author delivers some more information about the British Isles.

D. It's about the history of the country.

8. The author's purpose in Passage 2 is to .

A. introduce England to you

B. tell you how many sheep in England

C. advise you to make a trip in England

D. introduce Salisbury in southern England to you

1.3 推理判断

9. What can you conclude from Passage 1?

A. The UK is made up of 4 countries.

B. The British Isles lies off the west coast of Europe.

C. The culture of the UK is a mixture of different coun-tries in the world.

D. The climate of the British Isles is mild wkh a lot of rain.

10. What can you infer from Passage 2?

A. People there live a happy life.

B. Salisbury is a mountainous city.

C. People in Salisbury mainly grow fruit trees.

D. Salisbury has a short history.

Keys: 1.D.2.B 3.B 4.C 5.C 6.A 7.C 8.D 9.A 10.C

知识点：

1. employ vt.雇用；使用，利用

be employed in忙于／从事(某活动)

employer／employee n．老板／雇员

Miss Liu is employed in a Chinese-foreign joint company．

刘小姐受雇于一个中外合资公司。

This village factory employed some graduates and a doctor in

law．这家村办工厂雇用了一些大学毕业生和一名法律博士。

She’s employed in watering the garden． 她正忙于浇花园。

[考题1] The difference between Tom and Mike lies in how they____their spare time．Once it is made full use of，the result

will be quite different．

A．take B．cost C．employ D．spend

[解析]本题的语境十分充分,句中的it实指spare time .所缺动词的含义实际上等同于make use of ,即employ其他三个动词均与时间有关，但与本题语境无关。[答案] C

2．stand for代表

The letters “USA ”stand for the United states of America．

“USA”这几个字母代表美利坚合众国。

Do you know what UFO stands for? 你知道UFO代表什么吗?

含stand的词组还有：

How do you stand by and see such wrong doing?

你对这样的错误行为怎能袖手旁观呢?

He will stand by you whatever happens.

不管发生了什么他都支持你。

He stood with us in that debate．

在那场辩论中他站在我们一边.

[考题2]There _____all old temple on the hi．can you see it?

A．1ies B．1ying C．stands D．standing

[解析] 根据语法规则分析可知，本题缺少谓语动词：主语为an old temple，表语为there，所以这是个there be句型，因为B、D两项不可作谓语，所以被排除。stand与lie的区别如下：动词stand可用来表示高形物体位于何处,如:建筑,树,人等.而动词lie用来表示非高形物体位于和处,如地区,国家,河流,田野,铁路等.如:

The house stands on the hiⅡ．这房子坐落在那小山上。

West of the town 1ies a railway．城西有一条铁路。

[答案] C

3． form n．形状，形态,外形,体型；表格

Vt. vi形成，构成；建立，排列；养成

take the form of采取……的形式

form a company创办公司

Ice forms at O℃．摄氏0℃时结冰。

[考题3]The cookies were all ______ stars．

A．in form of B．in forms of C．in the form of D．in form

[答案] C

4． in general一般,大体上

in the general概括地说

In general ,standards of hygiene are good．

一般说来，卫生情况良好。

[考题4]People _______ 1ike her，although sometimes she annoys them．

A．in generally B．general C．in general D．in a general

[答案] C

5． influence n．& v．

(1) influence on/over sb./sth.

(2) influence on sb./sth.

(3) 作动词,意为影响

I used my influence with the boss t0 get things changed．

我借用与老板的交情对事情做了一些改革。

The fact that he is rich and famous and no influence on our

decision．

他有钱有名气，但这不会影响到我们的决定。

Nobody should drive while they are under the influence of alcohol.

谁也不得酒后开车。

His new girlfriend has been a good influence on him．

他的新女朋友对他有着良好的影响。

Her style of painting has been influenced by Japanese art．

她的画风一直受到日本艺术的影响。

拓展：

affect一般指生理／物质上的改变

influence较多用于指感觉／态度上的改变

[考题5](1)Over-heating development might have bad ______ on

the national economy．

A．cause B．influence C．result D．factor

[答案] B

(2)My parents considered my friend to be a bad ______ on me．

A．effort B．influence C．affect D．result

[解析] affect主要用作动词=have an effect on , effort指努力，result指结果，均不合题意。[答案] B

(3)Honestly speaking，it is my teacher’s ______ that mademe finally take up my present career as a biology researcher．

A．advantage B．influence C．taste D．guard

[解析] 根据题意,是老师的影响让我最终从事了现在的事业.A项advantage意为“优势”，taste意为“口味”，“guard”，意为“警戒”， 均不符合题意[答案]B

6．judge vt.判断，鉴定,断定，认为,审判

n ．法官,审判员,裁判员

I'm no judge of music．我对音乐是外行。

She is a good judge of wine．

她是鉴别酒的专家。

Who will judge the next case?

谁将审理下一个案子?

拓展：

judge…by／from…由……来判断

judging from…由……来看

Judging from what you say，he ought to succeed.

从你说的来看，他应该成功。

[考题6](1)______ from his accent，he must be_____ America．

A． Judged；from B．To judge；of

C．Judging；from D．Judging；of

[答案]C

(2)____ from the number of cars，he thought，there were not many people at the club yet．

A．To judge B．Judged C．Judging D．Having judged

[解析]judging from/by﹍ 由﹍来看, 由﹍判断,为固定结构.[答案]C

7．approach n.靠近；走近；方法；途径 vi ＆ vt 走近；靠近；着手(考虑)处理；(因事)找或接近

The approach of winter brings cold weather．

冬天的临近使天气转冷了。

All approaches are blocked．所有的道路都堵塞了。

He approached the problem with caution．他开始认真考虑这个问题。

[考题7] When is the best time to ______ my employer about an increase in salary?

A．arrive at B．get to C．reach D．approach

[解析] 本题考查动词和短语词义辨析。A、B、c三项表示具体的“到达……”，D为与﹍接洽或交涉 [答案]D

8．表示“构成”的三个词组

consist of 构成；由11组成

make up 构成；组成

be made up of 由11构成

Light consists of waves．光由波构成。

A car is made up of many different parts．

一辆小轿车由很多不同的部分组成。

Eleven players make up a football team．

一支足球队由11名队员组成。

[考题8] The world is seven continents and four oceans．

A．made up of B．made out of

C．made from D．made in (全国高考题)

[解析]be made from表示“由……制成”，be made in表示“在……

生产”，均不合题意。[答案] A

9．make(+the)+n.+of词组小结

make the most of充分利用/展现

make the best of 好好去做，往好里做

make the worst of(在困难情况下)不肻好好干

make use of 利用

He wanted to make the most of his chance to learn．

他想充分利用他的机会来学习。

One must learn to make the best of a bad job．

一个人必须要学会把一个坏工作好好地干好。

Do you want to make use of my bicycle?你想用我的自行车吗?

[考题9]Such good use has been his spare time his

English has improved a 1ot．

A．made of：that B．made of；as

C．made in；that D．found in；as(成都诊断题)

[解析]分析句子结构在解答本题时占极其重要的作用。句中含词组make good use of及句型such1that。use被提到句首，后面的组成部分不能少了make与of；另外such good use 也放在句首，表示强调。本句是一个结果状语从句，所以不用引导定语从句的such…as [答案] A

10. as+adj./adv.+as的用法

(1)表示“﹙可数的量﹚多达”时用as many as；表示“﹙不可数的量﹚多达”时，用as much as。

As many as 10 or 11 poople were found living in a single room．

多达十到十一人被发现生活在一个单间里。

She earned as much as 50 dollars a week．

她每周挣的钱达50美元。

(2)as far as 表示“和11一样远；远到；据……所知”。

Let’s walk as far as the bus station.

让我们走到车站去吧。

As far as I know，7 Chinese were kidnapped.

据我所知，有七名中国人遭到绑架。

[考题15]

(1)一Our holiday cost a 1ot of money．

一Did it?Well，that doesn't matter--you enjoyed yourselves．

A.as well as B．as good as

C．as far as D．as long as(北京东城区题)

[解析] as good as有本义(和……一样好)与比喻义(几乎；差不多已经)。as long as也是如此；“像……一样长；只要(类似于if)”as Well as除了作连词外，还有本义：“和……一样好”。[答案]D

(2)John plays football ，if not better than，David．

A．as well B．as well as

C．so well D．so well as

[解析] 这是个条件状语从句，由此可知空白处表示“和……一样好”，肯定句中用as weU as，否定句中多用so well as。[答案] B

10．三个“国家”的区别

nation，state和country均可表示“国家”，但是nation指具有某些共同特征的人群、民族居住在一个地区，拥有一个独立的政府的“国家”；state强调政治意义上的“国家”；country强调国土意义上的 国家。

Railways in Britain belong to the State．

在英国，铁路属于国家所有。

Which country's weather is most 1ike China’s?

哪个国家的天气与中国的最相像?

[考题10]India，which is one member of the united ，is a

developing with the second largest population in the world

A．States；state B．Nations；country

C．Countries；nation D．Nafions；state

[答案] B

11．含hold的词组小结

Hold on!Everything will be 0K． 坚持下去!一切都会好的。

Wait．Ho1d on a minute!别忙挂电话。

Hold up your hands!请举手。

The traffic was held up by an accident． 车辆被事故堵住了。

Take／catch ho1d of my hand!抓住我的手!

We cannot be defeated while we hold together．

我们团结在一起就不会被击败。

[考题1 1] We thought of selling this old furniture，but

we’ve decided to it．It might be valuable．

A．ho1d on to B．keep up with C．turn to D．1ook after

(20全国高考题)

[解析] keep up with表示“跟上”，turn to表示“转向”，1ook after表示“照顾”。语境表示“……我们决定不卖，因为它可能有价值。” 所缺短语含义为“不要放弃／不卖掉”。本题要充分利用排除法，因为平时只见到hold on，很少拓展hold on to的用法，因此了解一下常用词组的次常见含义有必要的。[答案] A

12．含run的词组小结

(1)本单元中的run over作“(车辆)辗压；溢出；匆匆看／复习一遍；预演一遍；简短地说一遍”讲。

He was run over by a car．他被车辗了。

The water ran over the edge of the jar．水溢出坛边了。

The speaker ran over his notes before the 1ecture．

演讲之前，演说者又看了一遍稿子。

(2)含run的词组还有：

run across邂逅 run into撞上／进

run away走掉 run out(of)用光

run away from逃避 run through匆忙看

be on the run忙碌 in the long run从长远看

[考题20]

(1)Be careful when you cross this very busy street．If not，you may run over by a car．(年北京高考题)

A．have B．get C．become D．turn

[解析] run over在本句中的含义为“被车辗过啊”。从用法上看， 此处应使用被动语态，而只有get done可以构成特殊的被动语态，表示遭遇到不幸等含义。[答案] B

(2)We are water．We’d better store some．

A．running out B．running out of

C．run out D．run out of

[解析]run out表示“用光”，是个不及物动词，后面不能接宾语也不可用于被动语态，所以A、C两项被排除。D项是被动形式，也不接语。

[答案] B

13. 含time的词组小结

at a time一次；每次

at one time一度；曾经(=once)

at the same time与此同时；虽然如此

from time to time时而，不时地

in time及时；迟早、终究

on time准时，按时

at times有时候(=sometimes)

a11 the time一直

[考题13] ，I 1ost heart in English learning，but my teacher often said to me，“Keep on working hard；you’llsucceed ．”

A．At a time；in time B．At a time；on time

C．At one time；in time D．At one time；on time

[解析]本题显然是考查at a time与at one time、in time与ontime的用法及区别。注意从at one time相当于once(one与once很相似)、in time有两重含义(相当于sooner or later)这两个技巧与能力方面入手，即可找出本题答案。[答案] C

14．“of+修饰词+n.”的用法

(1)be of+抽象名词，相当于“be+其同根形容词”，表示“是……的”，该抽象名词前可以加much，great，little，some，no等词修饰。

The book is of great importance(=very important)to you.

(2)be of+普通名词。该普通名词一般没有相应的形容词，所以不存在“be+adj．”的转换形式。

Coins may be of different sizes，weights，shapes and different metals.硬币可能大小、重量、形状不同，所用金属材料不同。

They were both of middle height． 他们俩都是中等身材。

(3)be of+不定冠词或one等词+名词，表示“同一的”。

The coats are of a colour．这衣服颜色一样。

we are of one opinion．我们意见相同。

The two pairs of shoes are of one size．

=The two pairs of shoes are of the same size．

这两双鞋大小一样。

(4)be of+普通名词或物质名词，表示“由……制成”，“由……组成”。

The wall is of stone．=The wall is made of stone．

这墙是用石头砌成的。

(2)Most animals have little connection with animals of different kind unless they kill them for food．(全国高考题)

A．the；a B．／；a C．the；the D．／；the

[解析] kind是个可数名词，所以前面加不定冠词a；a differen kind作定语，修饰animals，而此处animals泛指任何动物，所以前面不加冠词。[答案] B

(3)--How many parts is the bed wood ?

一Three separate parts．

A．made of；made up of B．made from；made up

C．making of；making up D．making from；making up of

[解析] 分析句子结构可知，“--wood'’作定语，修饰bed，表示“由木材制成的”，用the bed made of wood表示；第二空与is构成词组“由……组成”，用be made up of表示。[答案] A

15．表示“据说”的三种句型及拓展

(1)It is said that+主语+谓语部分

(2)People say that+主语+谓语部分

(3)主语+be+said+to+谓语部分

It is said that the population is 3 million．

=People say that the population is 3 million．

=The population is said to be 3 million．据说人口是三百万。

拓展：类似词还有：report，know，believe，hope，suppose，tell．

[考题15]

(1) at least a score of buildings will be built soon．

A．It hopes B．It is hoped that

C．We are hoped D．It is wished that

[解析] hope只可接单宾语，故排除c项。It is hoped that．．．意为“人们希望……” [答案] B

(2) that he has retumed home for one month．

A．It is said B．It said C．It was said D．It says

[解析] It is said that“据说……”。由“has”一词可知本题时态，故不可选C项。答案为A。

16．名词性从句(I)--宾语从句和表语从句

(1)宾语从句中that与what的用法 ．

what在宾语从句中，有代替名词的作用，在句中可作主语、宾语或

表语。that只起引导作用，不作任何成分，可省略。

He seems different from what he used to be．

(作表语)他看上去与过去不一样了。

-The fire destroyed what was in the building．

(作主语)大火摧毁了大楼里的东西。

(2)宾语从句中复合关系名词whoever，whichever，whatever等有代替名词的作用

You may do whatever(anything that)you like．

(“无论什么”，作宾语)你可以想做什么就做什么。

You can choose whichever you 1ike．

(“无论哪一个”；作宾语)你能选择所喜欢的任意一个。

(3)表语从句常考点

(1)对引导词(连词)的正确选择。表语从句可由that，what,

who(whom)，when，where，how，why，whether等连词引导。

The question is whether we can catch the early bus．

问题是我们是否能赶上早班车。

(2)含有几个须用虚拟语气作宾语的词（如：suggest，advise，order等）或名词的表语从句中也用（should）do 形式。

My suggestion (advice) is that he (should) be sent to hospital at once.

[考题24](1)Sometimes we are asked__ the likely result of an action will be．

A．that we think B．what we think

C．what do we think D．that what we think

[解析] 宾语从句是名词性从句中的考查热点，其中又以测试引导词、语序、主从句的时态占绝大比例。选项中we think为一插入成分，解题时可将其放在一边。句中be动词后缺表语，因此应用what。 [答案]B

(2)Go and get your coat．It’s you left it．

A．there B．where C．there where D．where there

[解析] 本题考查引导名词性从句的连接副词的用法。在从句中,there是不能引导句子的，因为there只是副词，不是连接副词。Where引导表语从句并在从句中作状语。[答案] B

(3)The difficulty we now meet with is we can persuade him to tell the truth．

A．that B．what C．how D．why

[解析] 句意为“我们现在碰到的问题是如何能够说服他讲实话。”

[答案] C

(4)After five hours’drive，they reached--they thought was the place they'd been drearning of.

A．that B．where C．which D．what

[解析] 句中they thought是插入语成分，所以引导词引导宾语从句且作主语，只有what符合题意。[答案] D

能力题型设计

[预测1]一My mathematics is very poor．

一Don’t worry．I'll help you I can．

A．as far as B．as soon as

C．as quickly as D．as possible as

[预测2]Don’t all speak at once! ，please．

A．Each at one time B．One by one time

C．One at a time D．One for each time

[预测3]一May I put my luggage on the seat beside you，sir，if it is free?

-

A．Oh，please yourself B．Well，never mind

C．Yes，help yourself D．Sure，with pleasure

[预测4]一Why would you go to China in a million years?

一Because I want to see in the future．

A．what China will 1ook like B．what will China look like

C．China will 1ook Iike what D．what 1ook will China lik

[预测5]I have found out they will ask to leade the victory march on Saturday.

A．when B．where C．whom D．how

[预测6]一Why do you drink so much coffee?

一Well， it doesn't keep me awake at night，I see no harm in it．

A．although B．as 1ong as C．while D．where

[预测7]His ability has never been in doubt the question is he is prepared to work hard．

A．if B．that C．when D．whether

[预测8]Do you think the young man Miss Alice is shaking hands with Mary?

A．pretty B．beautiful C．1ovely D．handsome

[预测9]we met with many different people and various things all the journey．

A．a1ong B．over C．through D．around

[预测10]As unemployment is very high nowadays，it’s very difficult for poeple to find work．

A．the；不填 B．the；a c．不填；不填 D．an；the

[预测11]we sometimes refer to the people of a as the ．

A．country；nation B．nation；state

C．country；state D．nation；country

[预测12]The committee is--of fifteen members．

A．invented B．consisted C．formed D．made up

[预测13]一I shall be sent to England to see my grandmother．

一Really?You should make the--of this chance to improve your

oral English．

A．most B．much C．advantage D．better

[预测14]一Dad，I have doubt about myself whether I shall go on with my present career．

--Don't be discouraged，my boy.If you insist on what you are doing，you’ll--a successful man．

A．make B．form C．get D．grow

[预测15 ]-Why must you stay in the countryside, no electricity, no television, no computer?

-Oh, no, I have found it for my health.

A. great value B. of great valuable

C. rather valuable D. of very value

[预测16 ] A number of scientists __ that the number of wild animals getting smaller and smaller.

A. says ; are B. say ; is

C. says ; have been D. say; were

[预测17 ]-Excuse me,did you see a red car rushing here?

-Oh, yes, it sped .

A. in the east B. to east

C. east D. to easterly

[预测18 ]Violence on TV may turn out to be a strong __ on some young people.

A. proof B. impression C. influence D. basis

[预测19]The British Isles are surrounded by the Atlantic Ocean to the west, and

A. the North Sea is to the east

B. the North Sea to the east

C. to the east is the North Sea

D. to the east the North Sea

[预测20]With spring ,the weather became warmer.

A.approaches B. approaching C.approach D.appoached

短文改错：

When tea and coffee was first introduced to Europe1.

in 18th century,people thought they were harmful. 2.

So the king of Sweden decided to find out whether this3.

was true or not. It was happened that there were two4.

brothers were in prison at the time. The king ordered5.

one of them drink tea every day and the other coffee.6.

Both of them have lived many years without any problem.7.

At last the one who had to drink tea every day died at 8.

the age of 83 and the other lived even long. Because of 9.

this, Sweden is today one of the countries where many tea andcoffee are drunk. 10.

Keys:

1．A as far as I can表示“尽我所能”。若选D，possible改为Possibly。

2．C at a time表示“每次；一次”。句意为“大家不要一齐说；每次一个人来说。”

3．A please yourself表示“请便”，相当于do as you please。

4．A see后面的宾语从句中用陈述句语序；特殊疑问词what应放在句首。

5．C引导词指人，且作ask的宾语。

6．B句意表示“只要”。

7．D 主语是“问题”，所以应由疑问词引导才行；if不引导表语从句。

8．D 表示男性英俊潇洒用handsome，其他三个词多用于女性。

9．C through此处指自始至终。

10．C “失业(unemployment)”及“工作(work)”二词均为不可数名词。

11．A根据题意可知，前空应为country。the people of a country意为“一个国家的人民”，后空应表示“民族”。

12．D be made up of“由……组成”。consist of不用被动。

13．A make the most of=take advantage of表示“充分利用”。

14．A make表示“成为……”；form多用于多个部分形成一个整体；grow后接into才符合题意。

15．C 选项A、B和D都改为“of great value”才对。

16．B A number of+复数名词作主语，谓语用复数；the numberof+复数名词作主语，谓语用单数。

17．C east作副词，表示“向东方”；选项B改为to the east，这时east作名词用，easterly是副词，前面不加介词。

18．C proof表示“证明”，impression：表示“印象”，basis表示“基础”，均不符合语境“影响”

19. B

20. B

短文改错

1．was→were 2．in后加the 3．this→it 4.It后was去掉

5．去掉were 6．drink前加to 7．have去掉 8.√

9．1ong→1onger 10．many→much

最新五年高考名题诠解

1．(全国卷Ⅳ)The road is covered with snow．I can’t understand

they insist on going by motorbike．

A．why B．whether C．when D．how

[解析]本题考查宾语从句的引导词。根据语句的意义,选A项比较恰当。句意为“路面上覆盖满了雪，我不明白他们为什么坚持骑摩托车呢。”[答案] A

2．(20湖南高考题)I think Father WOUld like to know I've

been up to so far，so I decide to send him a quick note．

A．which B．why C．what D．how

[解析] 考查宾语从句连词用法，由结构sb．be up to sth．可知，应选what作介词to的宾语。[答案] C

3．(年北京高考题)We cannot figure out quite a number of

insects，birds，and animals are dying out．

A．that B．as C．why D．when

[解析]本题考查宾语从句知识，figure out为及物动词，故此句为语从句，从句意得知连词在从句中作原因状语。故选why。 [答案] C

4．(2004年广东高考题)Parents are taught to understand important education is to their children's future．

A．that B．how C．such D．so

[解析]understand是个及物动词，故后接宾语从句；宾语从句中还含有感叹句型：how+adj.+主语+谓语部分。[答案]B

5．(2004年上海春季高考题)The other day，my brother drove his car down the street at I thought was a dangeous speed．

A．as B．which C．what D．that

[解析]I thought为插入语，对句子结构不产生影响；at后为宾语从

句，引导词作主语，故用what。

[答案]C

6．(2004年北京春季高考题) I can see，there is only one

possible way to keep away from the danger．

A．As long as B．As far as

C．Just as D．Even if

[解析]“据我所知”应译为as far as I see。

[答案]B

7．(2002年上海春季高考题)The cakes are delicious．He’d 1ike to have third one because second one is rather too small．

A．a；a B．the；the C．a；the D．the；a

[解析] 当序数词表示顺序时用定冠词the；表示再来一个用不定冠词a(an)。从句子的意思可知，third one表示再吃一个，所以third前用a；second one表示所吃的是第二个，所以前用the。[答案] c

8．(2004年湖南高考题)You can't wear a blue jacket that shirt-it’ll

1ook terrible．

A．on B．above C．up D．over

[解析] 考查介词用法。 on”在……上面”强调物品的准确相对位置

above“在……上方”强调大致的相对位置；up‘上面”，强调方向，不表示具体位置；over“在……处”强调“覆盖”的含义。 [答案] D

9．(20北京高考题)They had a pleasant talk a cup of coffee．

A．for B．with C．during D．over

[解析]a cup of coffee实指一杯茶的时间，“在……时间内”用介词 over。[答案]D

10． --The boys are not doing a good job at all，are they?

- . (年北京春季高考题)

A．I guess not so B．I don’t guess

C. I don’t guess so D. I guess not

[解析] 用来代替第一句中的否定句are not doing a good job at all 要用not。[答案] D

11．(上海高考题)The sunlight came in the windows in the roof and lit up the whole room．

A．through B．across C．on D．over

[解析] 光线是从窗子内部穿过，故用through。[答案] A

12．(20全国高考题)A computer can only do you have instructed it to do．

A．how B．after C．what D．when

[解析]what引导宾语从句作do的宾语。[答案]C

13．(年上海春季高考题)What the doctors really doubt is my mother will recover from the serious disease soon．

A．when B．how C．whether D．why

[解析] 题中已有时间词soon，所以A项被排除。How表示“如何”，why表示“为什么”，明显不合题意。[答案]c

14．(2001年上海春季高考题)Little Tom was reluctant to tell the schoolmaster he had done the day before．

A．that B．how C．where D．what

[解析]这是一个宾语从句。宾语从句中he had done后缺少宾语，所以要填what。句意为“小汤姆不愿意告诉他的校长前一天他做了什么。”[答案] D

15．(20全国高考题)It's always difficult being in a foreign country ,if you don’t speak the 1anguage．

A．extremely B.naturally

C.basically D．especially

[解析] 句意为“身处外国是很艰难的，尤其是你(especially)如果不讲当地语言的话。[答案] D

16．(2002年全国高考题)The taxi driver often reminds passengers to

their belongings when they leave the car．

A．keep B．catch C．hold D．take

[解析] 句意为“乘客下车时，带走他的随身物品。”[答案] D

17．(2002年北京高考题)His mother had thought it would be good for his

character to from home and earn some money on his own．

A．run away B．take away

C．keep away D．get away

[解析] 句意为“离开家在外，独立自主地挣一些钱对他的性格是有好 处的。”run away from表示“从……逃跑”,take away from表示“使停学；使离开”，keep away from表示“避开；使下去”。[答案] D

知识与能力同步测控题

(满分120分；时间100分钟)

一、单项填空(共15小题；每小题1分。满分15分) 从A、B、C、D四个选项中，选出可以填入空白处的最佳选项。

1．We can’t believe that he drew such a silly conclusion according

to_______he took for granted(想当然)．-

A．as B．that C．what D．it

2. Tom insist what he said true and we insisted that he and have a look．

A．be；should go B．should be；would go

C．was；go D．was；would go

3．The little stone house near the lake is just it was 20 years ago

A．the same B．that C．as D．1ike

4．一I’ve got--I am by hard work．

-No,you didn’t．You got with your father’s money．

A．there；where B．where；there

C．there；there D．where；where

5．一The family will do everything for him．

-That is they go wrong．

A．when B．how C．because D．where

6．After five hours’drive，they reached they thought was the place they’d been dreaming of.

A．that B．where C．which D．what

7.--I don't know whether I should go abroad or not，Mum．

--I leave to your own judgment whether you should do it．

A．that B．it C．this D．what

8．-Can children swim in the pool?

一Yes．However，at no time they do so alone．

A．may B．need C．could D．should

9．一Why do you drink so much coffee?

一Well，--it doesn’t keep me wake at night，I see no harm in it.

A．although B．as 1ong as

C．while D．where

10．一Is registering(登记)for a pet dog very expensive?

一Yes．In Tianjing，it can cost 2，000 yuan．

A．as high I as B．as much as

C．so high as D．so much as

11．It takes to do a thing right than explajn why you did it wrong

A．1ess time B．fewer times

C．more times D．much time

12．The president sajd firmly that would he leave Iraq．

A．at any time B．at one time

C．in no time D．at no time

13．一He is very poor in his study．

-Take it easy．We will help him we can．

A．whatever B．no matter which C.as well as D．as far as

14．Being able to speak another language fluently is a great when you're Iooking for a job．

A．advantage B．chance

C．assistant D．importance

15．Bamboo,a special kind of grass，Can be made chairs，

tables,curtains and some other things．

A．up of B．from C．of D．into

二、完形填空(共20小题；每小题1．5分。满分30分)

阅读下面短文，掌握其大意，然后从各题所给的四个选项(A、B、c、D)中，选出最佳选项。

When Ronaldinho(小罗纳尔多)scored the decisive goal for Brazil and pushed Endand out of the 2002 world Cup，not all British people were disppointed． 16 ，many fans in Scotland celebrated England's failure．

This may sound 17 but Scottish people have their own world football team and national league．The first match between Scotland and 18 was played as 19 as 1871．And today Scotland still plays 20 Endand in various competitions including the World Cup and UEFA Cup(欧洲联盟杯)．If they 21 ,it would be a Scottish flag that’s raised．

Football in the UK mirrors the countries’cultural 22 ．It shows the relative independence of Scotland，which 23 itself more from England than either Wales of Northern Ireland．

Scotland was 24 a totally independent kingdom．During the ninth century，it had a good many 25 and bloody wars with Endand．The English and Scottish thrones(王权)were 26 in 1603 and again in 1707，when Scotland 27 became a part of Great Britain．

Today，many Scots are 28 about the English entering and 29 their country．There is a deep and 30 divide between the two nations．Scotland has 1ong fought for more 31 and now has its legal(法律的)and education systems．

This northern country is famous 33 its mountainous and beautiful scenery．Much of the famous highlands within the UK 34 in Scotland．

Scottish women are recognizable by their red and green tartan (格子呢)wools．The material can be seen in Scotland's everyday life．Scottish men are famous for wearing kilts(方格呢短裙)．They 35 to wear them at weddings and in parades when the Scots play traditional bagpipes(风笛)．

16．A．Besides B．Instead C．What’s more D．Such as

17．A．strange B．special C．surprised D．natural

18．A．Brazil B．England C．Britain D．Wales

19．A．1ong B．far C．early D．o1d

20．A．with B．for C．against D．through

21．A．played B．celebrated C．scored D．won

22．A．interests B．differences

C. similarities D. changes

23. A. unites B. divides C. breaks D. separates

24. A. never B. still C. once D. yet

25. A. disagreements B. diversities

C. controls D. influences

26. A. formed B. consisted

C. separated D. united

27. A. formally B. generally

C. namely D..afterwards

28. A. curious B. happy C. bitter D. pleased

29. A. approaching B. ruling

C. separating D. employing

30. A. powerful B. mistaken

C. ancient D. historical

31. A. proofs B. republic

C. independence D. Conquer

32. A. own B. national C. personal D. private

33. A. as B. to C. for D. because

34. A. includes B. forms C. lies D. consists

35. A. offer B. prepare C. fail D. tend

三、阅读理解(共20小题；每小题2分，满分40分)

A

One of Britain's bravest women told yesterday how she helped to catch suspected (可疑的 )police killer David Bieber---and was thanked with flowers by the police. It was also said that she could be in line for a share of up to ￡30,000 reward money,

Vicki Brown, 30, played a very important role in ending the nationwide manhunt. Vicki,who has worked at the Royal Hotel for four years, told of her terrible experience when she had to steal into Bieber's bedroom and to watch him secretly. Then she waited alone for three hours while armed police prepared to storm into the building.

She said:“I was very nervous. But when I opened the hotel door and saw 20 armed policemen lined up in the car park I was so glad they were there. ”

The alarm had been raised because Vicki became suspicious(怀疑)of the guest who checked in at 3 pm the day before NewYear's Eve with little luggage and wearing sunglasses and a hat pulled down over his face. She said: “He didn't seem to want to talk too much and make any eye contact (接触).” Vicki, the only employee on duty, called her bosses Margaret, 64, and husband Stall McKale,65 ,who phoned the police at 11 pm..

Officers from Northumbria Police called Vicki at the hotel in Dunston, Gatesbeed, at about 11:30 pm to make sure that this was the wanted man. Then they kept in touch by phoning Vicki every 15 minutes.

“It was about ten past two in the morning when the phone went again and a policeman said ' Would you go and make yourself known to the armed officers outside. My heart missed a beat.

Vicki quietly showed eight armed officers through passages and staircases to the top floor room and handed over the key.

”I realized that my bedroom window overlooks that part of the hotel,so I went to watch. I could not see into the man's room,but I could see the passage. The police kept shouting at the man to come out with his hands showing. Then suddenly he must have come out because they shouted for him to lie down while he was handcuffed(戴手铐). ”

36. The underlined phrase “be in line for”( Paragraph 1 )means .

A. get B. be paid C. ask for D. own

37. Vicki became suspicious of David Bieber because .

A. the police called her

B. he looked very strange

C. he came to the hotel with little luggage

D. he came to the hotel the day before New Year's Eve

38. Vicki's heart missed a beat because .

A. the phone went again

B. she would be famous

C. the policemen had already arrived

D. she saw 20 policemen in the car park

39. David Bieber was most probably handcuffed in .

A. the passage B. the man's room

C. Vicki's bedroom D. the top floor room

40. The:whole event probably lasted about hours from the moment Bieber came to the hotel to the arrival of some armed officers.

A. 6 B. 8 C. 11 D. 14

B

The tower of Big Ben, London's most famous building, has always leaned slightly, but construction work on a new line for the London Underground seemed likely to give the tower a real lean. Engineers have had to prop up(支撑) its base to prevent it from damaging the rest of the Houses of Parliament.

To control the tower's movement, engineers pumped out grout(水泥浆) into the soil under.the tower. The tower now leans an extra few centimeters, but the lean can only be seen by the most sharp-eyed observer.

Between 1995 and , to lengthen the Jubilee line of the Underground, builders dug a 40-metre-deep hole just 31 metres north of the clock tower. And the new tube (underground) tunnels were even nearer to the tower. John Burland, who recently helped stop the increasing lean in the Leaning Tower of Pisa and was an adviser to the Jubilee line project, believed the work would affect the tower. In his opinion, no further lean should go beyond a safety limit of 27.5 millimetres over the existing lean of 220 millimetres.

To keep the lean within this limit, Burland told the British Association about the new method of pumping grout immediately under the base of the tower. More than 300 tons of grout were pumped in during construction. The towers additional lean went between 10 and 25 millimetres ,but never passed 27.5 millimetres.

After the construction work was completed in late 1997, a review of movements in nearby walls showed that the building was in better shape than had been thought before and the safety measurements, taken this year, suggest that the tower's lean had just reached 35 millimetres. But following regular re-examinations of the tower, experts are sure that the tower has stabilized (稳定). A spokesman for London Underground says, “ We understand the tower has stabilized and returned to its normal movement cycle. ”

41. Which of the following drawing correctly shows how the propping up

construction was carried out?

42. What does the word review( in paragraph 5) mean?

A. Observation. B. Description.

C. Discussion. D. Re-examination.

43. Why was the propping up construction necessary?

A. To stop the tower of Big Ben from leaning.

B. To stop sharp-eyed people from seeing the lean.

C. To stop the Tower of Pisa from leaning too much.

D. To stop the clock tower from leaning beyond its safety limit.

44. What was the existing lean of the tower at the time when the article was writing?

A. 220 millimetres. B. 255 millimetres.

C. 35 millimetres. D. 27.5 millimetres.

45. We can infer from the article that

A. the tower of Big Ben will damage the Houses of Parliament

B. the Jubilee line should be stopped in Burlands opinion

C. the writer is blaming Burland for making a mistake

D. the propping up work has proved to be successful

C

Have you ever used a typewriter? If not, you've surely seen one. This useful machine has a most interesting history.

Although you may think that the typewriter is a modern invention,the idea goes as far back as the early 1700s. It was then, in 1714,that England's Queen Anne granted Henry Mill the first patent( 专利)for a machine that typed letters. Called An Artificial Machine or Method For Impressing Letters, the machine remained just a design on paper.

Various other typing machines were invented over the next hundred years or so. However, all of them had the same problem: they required more time to use than writing the same material by hand. Things improved a little around 1829 when an American named William Butt invented a machine called the desired letter.He also pressed a bar to link the paper. The machine printed letters well, but it had a top speed of only five words a minute.

Finally, in 1874, a more practical machine was introduced to the public. Invented by an American Christopher Sholes and some of his companions, the machine was set up by E. Remington and Sons and called the “Remington Model No. 1 ”. It was the first typewriter to have the kind of typewriter keyboard we know today.

You may have a look at the typewriter keyboard and wonder about the strange arrangement of letters. As a matter of fact, the keys were so arranged to force typists to type lower. Typing too fast caught the keys of Remington 1 pressed together. They still follow this early arrangement of letters of the keyboard.

46. What does the writer mainly talk about in this passage?

A. What a typewriter is.

B. How the typewriter was invented.

C. The function and use of a typewriter.

D. Remington and his invention.

47. “An Artificial Machine” was .

A. the first typewriter that was made by Henry Mill

B. highly praised by England's Queen as the first typewriter

C. hardly produced at all

D. made as the first typewriter in 1714

48. The first typewriters were made .

A. from 1700 to 1714

B. in the eighteenth century

C. in the nineteenth century

D. in the twentieth century

49. That the keyboard was designed so as today is because .

A. the inventor wanted to make typing slower than writing

B. the inventor meant to prevent the keys from being pressed

together

C. that it was arranged strangely

D. it has nothing to do with Remington

50. We can infer from the passage that modern typewriters are better that and different from the one invented by Sholes and his companions except for .

A. the size B. the keyboard

C. the form of letters D. the arrangement of the letters

D

The British have enjoyed an increase in IQ unmatched by anybody else in the developed world over the past 60 years, a study has revealed. James Flynn, a professor at the University of Otago in New Zealand and a leading authority on intelligence quotient (智商), says he has found an “exceptional and unappreciated” rise.

Last year the professor announced a worldwide increase in IQ showing that we are generally brighter than our parents, but are outwitted by our children. He suggested that the complexities( 复杂性) of modem life were stimulating ( 刺激) the brain. Now a comparison of data from thousands of tests in universities and the army in 20 countries has shown that this socalled Flynn Effect is greatest in Britain, with a 27-point increase in average IQ Since the Second World War.

Much of the British advantage comes from speaking English,the standard tool of communication in commerce and culture. TheBritish also benefit from IQ-boosters ( 推助器 ) such as lower truancy(逃学) and better nutrition than in America. This may help to explain why the typical British reader of J. R. R Tolkien's The lord of the Rings was believed to be 25 in the mid 1950s and 18 during the late 1960s, whereas the book is now widely enjoyed by 12-year-olds.

Psychologists believe up to 80% of an IQ score is determined

by genes. But a formula for high IQ would also include a larger-

than-average head and breast-feeding because milk helps the grainto develop. Bill Dickens,Flynn's research partner at the BrookingsInstitution in Washington D. C, believes the challenge of changingjobs may also have an impact: “ In which case countries like Britain, which have high levels of job changes, should produce some very bright people whose most obvious sign of their intelligence istheir insecurity(不安分) ”.

51. According to James Flynn, .

A. the British have had a sharp increase in IQ

B. the British remain at the same level in IQ

C. the British are the most clever people in the world

D. the British are cleverer than other people in the developed world

52. The underlined word “ outwitted” in the second paragraph probably means .

A. matched in wisdom

B. defeated by being cleverer

C. followed in wisdom

D. looked down upon

53. According to James Flynn, people in the world are generally

brighter because .

A. people live a better life than before

B. people enjoy better education

C. modem life is getting hard

D. modem life is not so simple as before

54. Which of the following is not a reason for the increase in

IQ of the British?

A. Speaking English. B. Changing jobs.

C. Higher truancy. D. Better nutrition.

55. The example of the typical BritiSh readers of The lord of the Rings shows that .

A. the younger a reader is, the more likely he will enjoy reading the book

B. it is the most difficult book to read

C. people are becoming brighter

D. it is more popular in Britain than in America

四、短文改错(共10小题；每小题1分，满分10分)

此题要求改正所给短文中的错误。对标有题号的每一行作出判断:如无错误，在该行右边横线上画一个勾(√)；如有错误(每行只有一个错误)，则按下列情况改正：

此行多一个词：把多余的词用斜线(＼)划掉，在该行右边横线上写出该词，并也用斜线划掉。

此行缺一个词：在缺词处加一个漏字符号(∧)，在该行右边横线上写出该加的词。

此行错一个词：在错的词下划一横线，在该行右边横线上写出改正后的词。

注意：原行没有错的不要改。

England is no a big country:from north to south and 56

from east to west, it is only about three hundreds miles57

across. But for a small country it has a surprised range58

of climates. People who have ever visited England, or 59

who has visited only one part of it, often make the mistake60

of thinking that it is cold and wet county. Except for 61

the summer months of June to September, this is probably 62

true in the north of England and the Midlands.In the south, however, ~e climate is too much more 63

pleasant. One result is because when people retire from a64

job in the north they often prefer move to the milder south.65

五、书面表达(满分25分)

雪梅镇是一个依山傍水的小镇。过去，这里的人们生活极其贫困。解放以后，人们生活的各个方面都发生了很大变化。

请根据下面表格里的提示，自拟题目，写一篇短文，介绍该镇的变化情况。

人 口 约20万

面 积 约36平方公里

地理概况 座落在太行山脚下，面临一条大河。新建有许多工厂、商店、医院、学校等。

教育状况 解放前只有一所学校。只有富家子弟可以上学。现在有10所学校，每个孩子都可以上学。

生活状况 丰富多彩。人们工作之余，可以逛商店、看电影、跳舞、参加体育活动等。

注意：

1．情况介绍必须采用短文形式；

2．要有标题；

3．词数：120左右。

篇3：高二英语模块5-8教案集(新课标版高二英语必修五教案教学设计)

Unit1 Module 5 Great Scientists

本单元教学内容分析:

本单元主要话题是“科学家如何以探索、钻研、无畏的科研精神验证未知的科学原理。”通过本单元的学习，了解科学家们对人类所做出的贡献及其成果。本单元所涉及的要点是：

（1）了解著名医生John Snow、钱学森、哥白尼等科学家以及他们的作为和故事。

（2）学习表示意愿、希望和建议的句型。

（3）学习过去分词作定语和表语的结构。

（4）学习写好“persuasive writing”,以训练学生的逻辑思维及写作能力.

The 1st Period

Teaching Aims:

1. Learn some new words and expressions.

2. Know some great scientists and their achievements.

3. Know some important qualities a scientist should have and the stages in examining a new scientific idea.

Difficult and Important Points:

1)Word study

2)Discuss in groups the stages in examining a new scientific idea.

Teaching Methods:

1. Inductive method

2. Pair work & group work

3. Word Study according to the situations given (Do exercises)

Teaching Procedures:

Step I Warming up

1. What do you know about great scientists?

Try this quiz and find out who knows the most.(Pair work to finish the Quiz Questions on P1.)

2.Check the answers with the whole class.

1).Archimedes (an ancient Greek mathematician & physicist)

2).Charles Darwin (British, author of The Origin of Species )

3).Thomas Newcomen (British, improved the first steam pump and turned it into a steam engine for taking water out of mines in 1712 .James Watt improved it and turned it into the first modern steam engine used on the railways. )

4).Gregor Mendel (Czech)

5).Marie Curie (Polish and French, won two Nobel Prizes)

6).Thomas Edison (an American inventor)

7).Leonardo da Vinci (a famous Italian artist)

8).Sir Humphry Davy (British)

9).Zhang Heng (Chinese, invented seismograph)

10).Stephen Hawking (a British astronomer)

Step II. Word Study

1.Read the new words after the tape.

2.Choose the correct words to complete the following sentences.

1) John Snow devoted himself to ________(science, scientific) research.

2) He worked hard until he drew a ____________(conclude, conclusion) in 1854.

3) The boy needs one more stamp to make his collection __________ (complete, completely)

4) ____________(Apart from, Except) that 10 dollars, I have another ten given by my mother.

5) Cholera was a ________disease. Many people _____ of it. (dead, die , death, deadly)

6) People who had drunk the __________ (polluting, polluted) water were dead.

7) I will tell him the good news ____________ I see him. (immediate, immediately)

8) I suggest _______(to have, having) a rest after working for such a long

time.

3. Choose the correct words or expressions to fill in the blanks. Each word or expression may be used only once.

1.Who _______________ a theory about black holes?

2.What ______________ did you draw?

3.The car went out of ___________ and crashed.

4.SARS is a terrible _____________ disease.

5.He _____________ a difficult argument skillfully.

6.The cholera outbreak was so ________ that more than 500 people had died in 10 days.

7. Everyone was silent as he ___________ the winner of the match.

8._____________ visiting the zoo, we went to the museum.

Step III. Practice (using inductive method)

Use the correct form of the words to fill in the blanks.

Infection

examination=exam

Science /scientist

Conclude

Analysis

Defeat

Value

announcement /announcer

Instruction

Calculate

contribution /contributor contributive

Instructor/instruction

Move

Rejection

Create

Completion

Persuader Persuade

n. adj. adv.

Certain certainly

co-operation X

Revolution X

Privacy隐私；隐居 Private

X backward

Enthusiasm enthusiastically

Logic logically

Step IV. Pre-reading

Discussion:

1.What five most important qualities do you think a scientist should have? Give the reasons.

generous clever strict patient creative strong-willed serious intelligent honest ambitious talented careful

2. Do you know how to prove a new idea in scientific research? Discuss in groups the stages in examining a new scientific idea. What order would you put them in?

Draw a conclusion Think of a method Collect results Make up a question Find a problem Analyse the results Repeat if necessary

After reading the following passage, put the correct stages into the reading about research into a disease.

Step V. Summary

Step VI. Homework Assignment

1.Read the passage John Snow Defeats “King Cholera”.

2. Learn the new words by heart and prepare for tomorrow’s dictation.

The 2nd Period

Teaching aims:

1. Learn some new words and expressions .

2. Improve the students’ reading skills.

3. Know how to prove a new idea in scientific research.

Difficult and Important Points:

1）Reading comprehension

2）What did John Snow do to prove a new idea in scientific research?

Teaching Methods:

1. Group work

2. Competition

3. Illustration

4. Deductive Method

Teaching Procedures:

Step I Warming up

Do you know these famous scientists?( Show the Ss some pictures of great scientists and have them say what achievements they have made.)

Step II. Pre-reading

1.Background introduction to John Snow

John Snow (1813-1858) was born and worked as a doctor in Great Britain. He was originally an anesthetist(麻醉师).He was so famous that he became the doctor for Queen Victoria at the births of her many children.

Four outbreaks of cholera in the 1830s and 1840s killed many people in England. In 1854, “the most terrible outbreak of cholera which ever occurred in the kingdom” began. It was so violent and sudden that 127people died in the first three days.

2.Make up a questionName of illness cholera (霍乱)

Symptom(症状) severe vomit (呕吐) and diarrhea (腹泻)

Aftereffect Die quickly from a loss of liquid

What was the cause of this illness ? How did John Snow find it out? (Deductive thinking)

Step III. New words study

Show the Ss a picture of “Water pump”, teach the new words pump& handle and have a brief introduction to it.(e.g. There were some water pumps in different districts in England in the 1850s.. People could use them to pump the water for daily life, but if someone removed the handle from the water pump, it could not be used.

Step IV. Reading

Fast-reading:Read the passage quickly and find the number below and the relevant happenings in the passage.(Competition among groups)

Two theories The first suggested that…multiplied in the air;. The second suggested…absorbed this disease into their bodies with their meals.

In 1854 Another outbreak hit London.

500 , 10

More than 500people had died in 10 days.

16, 37, 38 and 40 These numbers in Broad Street near the water pump had many of the deaths

20 ,21; 8,9

20 and 21 Broad Street and 8 and 9 Cambridge Street had no deaths….They didn’t drink the water from the Broad Street pump.

7

These families worked in the pub at 7 Cambridge Street. They didn’t drink the water from the pump.

Careful reading

Read each paragraph and find out what evidence or approach is John

Paragraph Stages in an experiment Example in this investigation

1 Find a problem What causes cholera?

2 Make up a question Which theory is correct?

3 Think of a method Collect data on those who were ill or died and where they got their water.

4 Collect results Plot information on a map to find out where people died or did not die.

5 Analyze results Analyze the water to see if that is the cause of the illness.

6 Repeat if necessary Find other evidence to confirm your conclusion.

7 Make a conclusion The water is to blame. The source of all drinking water should be examined so that it is safe.

Snow used in the stage of experiment, then fill in the chart below.

Step V. Discussion

1.What’s the significance of Snow’s famous cholera map ?

2.If you were John Snow, how would you investigate the cholera?

Step VI. Summary

Step VII. Homework assignment

1.Finish Ex.1 on P42.

2. Retell the story.

3. Prepare for tomorrow’s dictation.

The 3rd Period

Teaching Aims:

1. Learn expressions & phrases

2. Learn.language points

Difficult and Important Points:

1）Language points

2）The usage of “suggest & in addition”

Teaching Methods:

Presentation & Practice

Teaching Procedures:

Step I Revision

Have a dictation

Step II. Check the answers

Check the answers of yesterday’s homework (P42.Using Words and Expressions)

Step III. Expressions & phrases

Expressions & phrases (1)

1.know about… 了解……的情况

2.lift up 举起;抬起;提升

3.steam engine 蒸汽机

4.physical characteristic 人体的特征

5.put forward a theory about black holes提出一个有关黑洞的理论

6. infectious disease 传染性的疾病

7. in scientific research 在科学研究上

8. examine a new scientific idea 验证一个新的科学思想9. draw a conclusion 得出结论

10. analyze the results 分析结果

11. a well-known doctor 一个著名的医生

12. ordinary people 百姓;普通人

13. expose (…)to sth. 暴露(…..)在……中

14. the most deadly disease 最致命的疾病

15. terrified people 被吓坏的人们

16. get interested in sth./doing sth. 对…产生兴趣

17. absorb sth. into… 把….吸收入….

18. gather the information 收集信息

19. determine to do sth. 决心干某事20. a valuable clue 一条珍贵的线索

21. the water pump 水泵

22. in addition (to…) 除..…之外还有…

23. link … to … 将….和….联系起来 (be linked to…)

24. have it delivered (have sth. done) 叫某人送东西

25. die of… 死于…26. announce with certainty 肯定地宣布

27. polluted water 被污染的水

28. prevent sb. from doing sth. 阻止某人干某事

29. deal with… 处理……30. solve the problem 解决难题

Expressions & Phrases (2)

1.come to an end 到了尽头

2.find the cause of this illness 找出疾病的起因

3.look into… 调查……4.apart from… 除…..之外;此外 (=except for…)

5.prepare for… 预备好….

6.be strict with sb. 对某人严格要求

7.a revolutionary theory 一个革命性的理论

8.lead to… 通向…. ;导致… (注意:to为介词)

9.make sense 有意义

10. at times =sometimes 有时候

11. contribute to sth. 有助于;促进

12. encourage sb. to do sth. 鼓励某人做某事

13. point of view 观点

14. living conditions 居住条件

15. break… in/into pieces 把…摔成碎块

16. be devoted to sth./sb. 专致于…….; 关心…;挚爱…17. devote one’s life to doing sth. 献身于…..

18. curved line 曲线

19. achieve great success 取得巨大的成功

Step IV. Language Points

1.discover & invent

discover v. “ 发现” 被探索或被揭示的事物早已客观存在着.

Columbus discovered America in 1492.哥伦布于1492年发现了美洲.

Who discovered radium? 谁发现了镭?

invent v. “发明”,指的是发明原先不存在的东西.

Who invented the steam engine? 谁发明了蒸汽机?

2.who invented the way of giving electricity to everybody in large cities?是谁发明了把电带给大城市中的每个人的办法?

the way of doing sth.= the way to do sth … “做…..的方法”She showed us the way of cleaning it.= She showed us the way to clean it.她教给我们清洗它的办法.

the way引导的定语从句的引导词有三种, 可以用that;可以用in which;还可以省略.

I don’t like the way (that / in which) you speak to your father.

我不喜欢你跟你父亲讲话的方式.

与way相关的短语:by the way 顺便说 、

by way of … 通过……的方法，经，由

lose one’s way 迷路

no way (俚语) 没门,别想

feel one’s way 摸黑走,谨慎从事

on one’s way to…在去…的路上

in this way=by this means=with this method用这种方法

3.Who put forward a theory about black holes?谁提出了黑洞的理论?

put forward

(1) to offer (an idea, suggestion etc.) for consideration 提出(建议等)

(2)推荐某人或自己任职位;提名

May I put your name forward as our monitor?

我能否提名你当我们的班长?

put away 抛弃;舍弃 put down 写下来;记入名单;

put on 穿上;戴上;增加 put off 耽误;延期

put out 熄灭(灯);扑灭 (火) put up 建立;建造

put up with… 忍受……

You can take anything from the shelf and read, but please ______ the books when you’ve finished with them.

A. put on B. put down C. put back D. put off

4.This was the most deadly disease of its day.

die (v.) dead (adj.) death (n.)

deadly

adj. (1).dangerous; likely to cause death 危险的;致命的

a deadly disease/weapon

(2). highly effective against sth. or sb不强有力的;致命的

a deadly remark 击中要害的评论

(3)aiming to kill or destroy意在杀死的;不共戴天的:

a deadly enemy不共戴天的敌人

adv. (1). Very极度;非常;十分: deadly serious 十分认真

(2). like death 死一般地: deadly pale 死一般苍白

5.But he became inspired when he thought about helping ordinary people exposed to cholera.

expose在句中是过去分词作后置定语,表示被动.意为“患霍乱的”.如:The book written by Luxun is very popular.

expose v.

(1)to make visible 暴露 “expose ….to….”He exposes his skin to the sun. 他把皮肤暴露在阳光下.

(2)to reveal the guilt or wrong doing of …揭露;揭发

He exposed their plot.他揭穿了他们的阴谋.

I threatened to expose him ( to the police).我威胁要(向警察)揭发他.

expose to 使易受,使受 expose a fraud 揭穿骗局

expose sth. to the light of day 把某事暴露于光天化日之下

6. So many thousands of terrified people died every time there was an outbreak.每次爆发霍乱时就有大批惊慌的老百姓病死.

every time是连词,引导时间状语从句,意为“每次,每当”,如:

Every time I meet him, I always think of the things happened between us.每次见到他,我就想起发生在我们之间的事情.

immediately, the moment, directly, instantly 等都可以作连词,引导时间状语从句,意为“一……就……”,如:

I will give the letter to him immediately I see him.我一见到他就把这封信给他.

I came directly I got your letter.我一接到你的信就来了.

7.The first suggested that cholera multiplied in the air without reason.第一种看法是霍乱病毒在空气中无缘无故地繁殖着.(Suggest 用法参考P43.4,并完成相关的练习)

8.absorb v. 吸收(液体);承受;承担 (费用等)

Use the cloth to absorb the spilled ink. 吸干撒的墨水

We will not absorb these charges.我们不能承担这些费用.

absorb…in/by..吸引.注意

I was absorbed in a book and didn’t hear you call.专心看书

absorb…into…吸收…The big company has gradually absorbed these small companies into its own organization.

这家大公司逐渐将这些小的公司吞并了。

9.valuable

(1) adj. worth a lot of money值钱的;贵重的;有价值的

a valuable diamond 贵重的宝石 valuable information 重大的消息

(2) n. (常用复数形式) sth. that worth lots of money贵重物品

Mary kept her valuables in a safe.

玛丽把她的贵重的东西藏在保险箱里.

10.in addition adv. as well as 另外

In addition, the course also produces practical experience. 此外,这门功课还提供了实践的基础.

A number of people came to the zoo in addition to Peter and Paul. 彼得和保尔以外,还有许多别的人来到动物园.Step V. Practice

Finish the exercises on P4 & P42.P43 Ex.3.4.5.

Step VI Homework Assignment

The 4th Period

Teaching Aims:

1. Teach grammar (The Past Participle as the Predicative & Attribute)

2. Improve the students’ listening skills.

Difficult and Important Points:

1)Learn the grammar(The Past Participle as the Predicative & Attribute)

2)Have the Ss sum up the function of the past participle using inductive method.

Teaching Methods:

1. Inductive Method

2. Group work

Teaching Procedures:

Step I Dictation

Step II. Grammar

1.Please look at the sentences carefully. Pick out the attribute& predicative of the sentences.

1) I was angry with him for keeping me waiting so long.

2) She is a beautiful young lady.

3) He got worried about losing the money.

4) Sally was so excited at the good news.

5) So many thousands of terrified people died.

2.Please classify the words that you identify into groups and explain why you divide them into these groups.

angry beautiful young

worried excited terrified

3. Now use a different past participle/adjective in each sentence to change the mood of the sentence.

4. Discovering Useful Structures P4

(1).Find more examples in the reading passage where the past participle is used as attribute and predicative.1) Doctor John Snow was a well-known doctor in London. (Attribute)

2) John Snow told the astonished people in Broad Street. (Attribute)

3) He got interested in the two theories.(predicative)

4) Neither its cause, nor its cure was understood. (Predicative)

(2). Complete the table with phrases that have the same meaning

Step III. Listening P5 Using language

Step IV. Discussion

In pairs discuss what scientific job each of you would like to choose in the future.

(Refer to the questions &expressions on P6 that may help you)

Step V. Exercises

Finish Ex. 2 on P42. (Translation)

Finish Ex.1&2 on P44.(Using structures)

Step VI. Summary

Step VII. Homework assignment

The 5th Period

Teaching Aims:

1. Improve the students reading skills.

2. Learn something about Copernicus and his Revolutionary Theory

3. Learn how to accomplish a persuasive writing.

Difficult and Important Points:

1)Reading Comprehension

2)Persuasive writing.

Teaching Methods:

Comparative method

Teaching Procedures:

Step I Warming up

1.Do you know what is the center of the solar system?

2.Can you name the nine planets in the solar system?

Mnemonics (记忆术)

Mercury Venus Earth Mars Jupiter Saturn Uranus Neptune Pluto

Can you use a good method to memorize them ?My Very Easy Method: Just Set Up Nine Planets.

Step II. Reading

Title of the passage: Copernicus’ Revolutionary TheoryFast reading

Listen to the tape, and find out the answers to the questions.

1. What did Copernicus think was the center of the solar system?

2.When did Copernicus publish his theory?Careful reading

Why didn’t Copernicus publish his theory before he died?

Step III. Reading comprehension

P7. 1.Use the reading to help you draw the two theories of the universe.

Before Copernicus’ theory

A diagram showing the solar system with the earth at its centre

Showing Copernicus’ theory

A diagram showing the solar system with the sun at its centre

Step IV. Persuasive writing (Please refer to P8 Learning Tip)

Writing Task: P7.3.Now writing a short letter asking Copernicus to publish his ideas so everyone can read them.

First you need to collect your ideas. For example:

He believes his new theory is true.

There are problems with the present theory.

He has done many years of observations to prove his new theory is true.

Science can’t develop unless people publish their ideas.

Time will show if his theory is true or not.

Here is a plan:

Beginning: Tell Copernicus who you are and why you want him to publish his ideas.

Paragraph 1: Reason 1 and evidence.

Paragraph 2: Reason 2 and evidence.

Summing up: Ask him to think again about publishing his ideas.

One possible version:

Dear Nicolaus Copernicus,

I am a student studying astronomy and I would very much like to read your new theory about the solar system. I hope you will publish it for several reasons.

I understand the problems with the present theory. The way the planets move is not what you would expect if the earth was the centre of the universe. It is also odd that the brightness of some stars seems to change. So I agree with you that we need a new theory.

I know your observations have been very carefully carried out over many years. Now you must have the courage to publish them. Science can never advance unless people have the courage of their beliefs. I know you worry about what will happen if you publish your new theory. No matter how people oppose it, time will show if your ideas are right or wrong.

So I hope you will feel you can publish your new theory.

Yours sincerely,

Zhang Hua

Step V. Summary

Step VI. Homework assignment

1. Surf the Internet and get more information about Copernicus.

www.blupete.com/Literature/Biographies/Science/Copernicus.htm2. Revision

Nicolaus Copernicus was a Polish astronomer (1473-1543). Born in Torun, he began his university studies in Krakow in 1491, where he studied canon law and Latin and Greek classics. However he also had an interest in mathematics and astronomy. After obtaining his degree of Doctor of Canon Law (教会法规博士学位)in Italy in 1503, Copernicus returned home to Warmia in Poland to serve as Canon (=priest) .

In 1530, Copernicus completed his great work De Revolutionibus (《天体运行论》).Copernicus knew that these findings would lead him into trouble with the Roman Catholic Church (罗马天主教教徒), so he wasin no hurry to publish his theory. He only published it as he lay dying in 1543.

Though Copernicus did not live to hear of its extraordinary impact, the book which first suggested that the Sun, not the Earth, is the centre of the universe is now recognized as one of the most influential scientific works of all time. Adapted from www.library.rdg.ac.uk/colls/special/featureditem/copernicus

The 6th Period

Teaching Aims:

1. Improve the students’ listening skills.

2. Improve the students’ speaking skills.

Difficult and Important Points:

1)Listening

2)Help Ss overcome the difficulties in listening material.

Teaching Methods:

Class activities to help motivate the Ss’ interest of learning English.

Teaching Procedures:

Step I Warming up

1.Which plant and animal do you like best? Can you classify them into a system ?

2.Background: Carl Linnaeus (1707-1778) SwedishCarl Linnaeus is often called the Father of Taxonomy(分类学).He succeeded in classifying the plants and animals into a system that worked. His method was called “the sexual method” of classifying plants and animals.His system for naming, ranking, and classifying organisms is still in wide use today (with many changes). His ideas on classification have influenced generations of biologists during and after his own lifetime.

Step II. Listening P41

1.Choose which of the following statements most closely describes what this listening passage is about . Explain why the others are wrong.

A. This is about a man who wants to name a flower.

B. This is about a man who finds a flower and wants to own it.

C. This is about a man who finds a flower and wants to know if it is a new species of flower.

2. Listen to the tape again and try to complete the following passage.

To find the name of the unknown flower, first you have to go to see a flower ________. He /She will look in a special ________ written by Carl Linnaeus. He lived in __________ from ________to __________. He was very important because he solved a serious problem for _________ . He saw all plants and animals produce _________________________. Some animals produce __________ but others lay _______ while plants ______________. He used these different ways of producing young to put plants and animals into _________. For example, the group called birds lay ________ to produce young and they all have ________. Linnaeus put the plants and animals into smaller groups or species. He gave each one two names. One is for the large group, for example _______ and one is for the species, for example _________. So a parrot would be ___________. He was the first person to successfully classify(分类)all plants and animals.

Step III. Talking P41

Imagine you are going to meet a specialist about a newly-found flower. Your partner will be the assistant for the flower specialist. You both need a description of the other so you can recognize each other when you meet. Now ring the assistant to sort out the necessary information. Pair work (Making a telephone call)

How will I recognize you?

What special features do you have?

What will you wear?

How will I know you?

What do you look like?

You can recognize me because…I’m tall/short, fat/thin, young/old with…My…looks a bit like…I have large /small ,brown/green eyes with…

Step IV. Play a game: Can you guess who he/she is?

One acts as an assistant, the other acts as the third person who wants to introduce a visitor (in the class) to the assistant. The whole class guess who the visitor is.

Step V. Summary

Step VI. Homework assignment

The 7th Period

Teaching Aims:

1. Improve the students listening and reading skills.

2. Learn something about topology.

Difficult and Important Points:

Reading

What is Euler path?

Teaching Methods:

Use Puzzle & Diagram to make the passage clear and easily understood.

Teaching Procedures:

Step I Listening

Listening task P44

Step II. Play a Puzzle game

Can you go over it without missing any points or going over a line twice?

A A A

D D E

B C B C B C

Euler said, “If a figure has more than two odd points, you cannot go over it without lifting your pencil from the page or going over a line twice.”

Step III. Reading ( P45 ) Finding The Solution

1. Background

Leonhard Euler (1707-1783)

Born: 15 April 1707 in Basel, Switzerland

Died: 18 Sept 1783 in St Petersburg, Russia

Euler was a famous mathematician in the eighteenth century, he introduced a new branch of mathematics called topology. It is a form of geometry that help you understand things by turning them into diagrams.

2.Reading

What is Euler path?

Step IV. Work out the following Puzzles on P45&46.

Step V. Summary

Step VI. Homework assignment

The 8th Period

Teaching Aims:

Improve the students’ writing & speaking skills.

Difficult and Important Points:

1)Writing & “Peer response”

2)How to write a good composition in the limited time.(Ss are allowed to gather information about their composition beforehand.)

Teaching Methods:

Use the class activity “Peer response” to motivate the Ss writing interest, which can help them learn from each other.

Teaching Procedures:

Step I Warming up (5mins)

Talk about “Great”.

What thing or person do you think is great? Give an example.

Step II. Writing Task (P47) (20mins)

Choose a title beginning with “A Great …” to write a passage (200words or more) Or you can write a passage about A Great Scientist referring to writing tip on P47.

Step III. Peer Response

Group work: Peer Response (3 pluses and 1 wish) (15mins)

Peer Response

Class ________ Name:________ Date:________

Peer 1. Name:_________ Title:_______________________

+ _____________________________________________

+ _____________________________________________

+ _____________________________________________

? _____________________________________________

Peer 2. Name:_________ Title:______________________

+ _____________________________________________

+ _____________________________________________

+ _____________________________________________

? ______________________________________________

Step IV. Homework assignment

(1) Revise the composition and hand it in tomorrow.

(2) Review for tomorrow’s test.

Unit2 Module 5 The United Kingdom

教学内容分析:

本单元主要话题是“英国”。 通过阅读使学生了解英国的历史和地理位置，国家的构成及名胜古迹。

本单元所涉及的要点是：

（1）了解，认识英格兰，威尔士，苏格兰和北爱尔兰。

（2）了解伦敦的一些著名景观。

（3）学习过去分词作宾语补足语的句型。

（4）掌握与人交流语言理解有困难时请求别人重复的几 种表达方式。

The 1st Period ( Reading )

Teaching Aims:

Enable the students to know the UK in geography and history.

Teaching Important Points and Difficult Points:

How to understand the geographic puzzle of the UK.

Teaching Methods:

Skimming and task-based activities.

Teaching Procedures:

Step I Warming up

1. Background knowledge:

Name: The United Kingdom of Great Britain and Northern Ireland

Countries: England, Scotland, Wales, Northern Ireland

Capital: London

Location: Western Europe

Population: 60,441,457 (July )

Language: English, Welsh, Scottish

Ethnic groups: English 81.5%, Scottish 9.6%, Irish 2.4%,

Welsh 1.9%, Ulster 1.8%, West Indian, Indian, Pakistanis, and other 2.8%

Area: Total 244,820 sqk.

Climate: Temperate: moderated by prevailing southwest over the North Atlantic Current; more than one-half of the days are overcast

Natural resources: Coal, petroleum (石油), natural gas, iron ore, lead (铅), zinc (锌), gold, tin, limestone (石灰岩), gypsum (石膏)

Task 1: Describe briefly the UK according to the map.

1.The UK is surrounded by water in all sides.

2. On the west of the Great Britain lies the Irish Sea .

3. On the south of England lies the English Channel .

4. On the northeast lies the North Sea .

5. On the north is the North Atlantic Ocean .

Task 2

Ss do the quiz on page 9.

Step II. Pre- reading

Task 3. Ss discuss and answer the following questions.

1. Can you name the capital cities of the countries of the UK?

2. England can be divided into three main areas. Do you know what they are?

3. What do you know about any cities or towns in the UK?

Step III. While-reading

Task 4. Read the title and predict what the text will tell you.

Task 5. Talk about the different flags of the countries of the UK

Task 6. Skimming

According to the text, join lines to the right answer.

Para. 1. Explains the joining of England and Wales.

Para. 2. States topic to be examined in the reading.

Para. 3. Explains the importance of London as a

cultural and political centre in the UK.

Para. 4. Explains what the term “Great Britain”

means and how it came about.

Para. 5. Explains differences in the four countries.

Para. 6. Explains how England is divided into three zones.

Task 7. Answer the questions

1. The Union Jack flag unites the three flags of three countries

in the United Kingdom. Which country is left out? Why?

__________________________________________________

2. What three countries does British Airways represent?

1. ________ 2. ________ 3. __________

3. Which group of invaders did not influence London?

________________________________________________

Task 8. Ss read and get the general idea of the parts

Step IV. After-reading

Write a short summary of the passage.

The writer examines how the UK developed as an administrative unit. It shows how England is also divided into 3 zones. It explains why London became the cultural capital of England.

Step VI. Homework assignment

1. Read the whole passage and retell.

2. Go to the net to get more information about UK.

The 2nd Period (Language points)

Teaching Aims:

3. Learn expressions & phrases

4. Learn language points

Teaching Important Points:

Language points

Teaching Difficult Points:

Have /get sth. Done

Teaching Methods:

Presentation & Practice

Teaching Procedures:

Step I Revision

Retell the passage.

Step II. Expressions & phrases

Expressions & phrases (1)

1. consist of 由…组成

2. divided into 分开

3. There is no need (for sb.) to do…

4. debate about sth. 为…争辩（争论）

5. refer to 提及，谈到

6. connect to /link to 连接

7. as well (as ) 也，还有

8. to one’s (great) surprise 使…吃惊

9. find sb./ sth. done (doing) 发现某人（物）处于某种状态下

10. get sb. / sth. done

11. break away (from) 挣脱

12. break down （机器、车辆）坏

13. for convenience 为了方便

14. be known as/ for /to /by

15.keep one’s eyes open 睁大眼睛

16.make sth. worthwhile 使… 值得

17.leave out 省去；遗漏；不考虑

18. find out 发现

19. on the phone 在电话里

20. be on holiday 在度假

21. in memory of 为了纪念

22. leave for 动身去某地

23. ring out 发出响声，响起

24. make a list of 列出…的清单

25. pass through 通过

26. be on show 在展出

27. take the place of 代替，取代

28. remain doing 仍然在做…

29. on (special) occasions 在（特殊） 场合

30. feel / be proud of 为…而自豪

31. fall asleep 睡觉

Step IV. Language Points

1. consist of ＝ be made up of 由….组成 (没有进行时）

eg: The UK consists of Great Britain and Northern

Ireland.

＝Great Britain and Northern Ireland make up the UK.

The soup consists of tomatoes, meat and peas.

consist in = lie in 存在与；在于(无被动形式)

eg: The beauty of air travel consists in its speed

and ease.

consist with: 一致

The report consists with facts.

2. 区别:

separate …from (把联合在一起或靠近的人或物分离出来）

divide…into 把…分开 （把整体分为若干部分）

eg: The teacher divided the class into two groups.

eg: The Taiwan Strait separates Taiwan from Fujian.

As we joined the big crowd, I got ______ from my friends.

A. separated B. spared C. lost D. missed

3. There is no need to do sth 没必要做某事

eg: There is no need for you to help him.

There is no need to worry at all.

4. debate about sth.

eg. They debate about the proposal for three days.

debate /argue/ quarrel

5. clarify: vt./vi. (cause sth. to )become clear or easier to understand 澄清；阐明;清楚；明了

eg. I hope what I say will clarify the situation.

Can you clarify the question?

6. be linked to = be connected to /be joined to

This wire connects _____ that one.

A. with B. to C. of D. on

7. refer to

1) 提及，指的是…

eg: When he said “some students”, do you think he

was referring to us?

2) 参考；查阅;询问

eg: If you don’t understand a word you may refer to

your dictionaries.

Please refer to the last page of the book for

answers.

3) 关系到；关乎

eg: What I have to say refers to all of you.

This rule refers to everyone.

It was foolish of him to _____ his notes during that

important test, and as a result, he got punished.

A. stick to B. refer to C. keep to D. point to

reference: n. reference book

8. join A to B /link A to B 把A和B连接

eg: The Channel Tunnel will join Britain to Europe

by road.

9. included /including

10. name: n. v.

11. to one’s surprise

(prep)

“to one’s +名词” 表 “令某人…”

常见的名词有 “ delight, disappointment, enjoyment;

astonishment 等

eg: I discovered, to my horror, that the goods were

entirely unfit for sale.

To John’s great relief they reached the house at

last.

12. …found themselves united peacefully

“find +宾语＋宾补( adj; adv; v-ing; pp; 介词短语；

不定式）”

eg: A cook will be immediately fired if he is found

smoking in the kitchen.

You’ll find him easy to get along with.

They found themselves trapped by the bush fire.

When I woke up, I found myself in hospital.

I called on him yesterday, but I found him out.

13. get sth done =have sth done 使某事被做

eg: I'll just get these dishes washed and then I'll

come.

get + n. + to do

get + n. + doing

eg. You’ll get her to agree.

l’ll get the car going.

get done: 用于意想不到、突然或偶然发生，意为“被….”

Be careful when you cross this very busy street.

If not, you may _____ run over by a car.

A. have B. get C. become D. turn

14. break away (from sb / sth) 脱离；破除…

eg: It is not easy for him to break away from bad

habits.

The man broke away from his guards.

break down (会谈)破裂，失败；(汽车等)出故障;

(人的健康状况)变得恶劣；（情感）失控

eg. His car broke down on the way to work this

morning.

His health broke down under the pressure of work.

He broke down and wept when he heard the news.

Talks between the two countries have completely

broken down.

区别：break in 闯入;打岔 break off 中断，折断

break into 闯入 break out 爆发;发生

break up 驱散;分散,拆散

News reports say peace talks between the two

countries_____ with no agreement reached.

A. have broken down B. have broken out

C. have broken in D. have broken up

15. as well as 不仅…而且; 既…又…

eg: He is a teacher as well as a writer.

The children as well as their father were seen

playing football in the street.

16. relation: 关系；亲戚

eg. The cost of this project has no relation to the

results.

He is a close relation of mine.

17. convenience: n.方便；便利

We bought this house for its convenience.

convenient: adj.

be convenient to sb.

come and see me whenever ___________.

A. you are convenient

B. you will be convenient

C. it is convenient to you

D. it will be convenient to you.

18. be known as 作为…(身份)出名

be known for 因…而出名

be known to 为…所知

be known by 根据… 得知

eg: Fu Biao is known to everyone as a good actor.

He was known for his frankness.

19. attraction:

un. 1). 吸引；引力

cn. 2). 吸引人的东西；喜闻乐见的东西；精彩节目

Eg. attraction of gravitation 重力

He can’t resist the attraction of the sea on a hot

day.

A big city offers m

篇4：新课标高二必修5教案集(新课标版高二英语必修五教案教学设计)

设计教师：黄敏丽

Unit 1 Great Scientists

Teaching Goals:

1. Enable the Ss to familiar with some famous scientists and their contributions.

2. Enable the Ss to learn how to organize a scientific research.

3. Let the Ss learn the reading skill of getting the main idea of each para./ part & each passage .

Difficult points

1. How to grasp the main idea of each paragraph / part & each passage.

2. How to help the Ss use what they’ve learnt to do first aid treatment for burns correctly.

Teaching methods

1. Skimming & scanning methods to make the Ss get a good understanding of the text.

2.Discussion methods to make the Ss understand what they’ve learned in class.

3.Pair work of group to get every student to take part in the teaching-and-learning activities.

4.Competition and role-play method to arouse the Ss’ interest

Teaching process:

Period 1 Word study, Warming up, pre-reading

Pre-class task:

1. Preview new vocabulary of Unit 1, and especially pay attention to the pronunciation of the new word

2. Finish the quiz in Warming up( p1) in groups of four by referring to books or surfing the net.

Step 1 Learning Goals

Get Ss to go through the summing up form on p 8 in order to have a general idea of the learning goals of Unit 1

Step 2 Word Study

1. (Pair work) Get Ss to learn the new words and phrases on p92 within 3 mins, by reading them aloud to each other to make sure that they can pronounce the words correctly---- Get Ss to read aloud the words in pairs by turns, e.g. 1 pairs read 4 words then go to next pair

2. Practice Use the correct form of the words to fill in the blanks.

n. v. adj.

infection Infect Infectious

examination=exam examine X

science /scientist X scientific

conclusion conclude X

analysis analyse X

defeat defeat X

value Value(估价，评价) valuable

instructor/instruction instruct Instructive(有益的，教育性的)

contribution /contributor contribute contributive

creation create creative

calculation calculate X

movement move movable

completion complete completive(完成的，完全的)

enthusiasm X enthusiastic

Step 3. Warming up (Group competition and introduce the great scientists)

1.Check the answers to the quiz to find out which group know the most .

2.Introduce the great scientists.

1) Archimedes (287-212 BC) Ancient Greek. He was a mathematician. He found that if you put an object into water the water pushes the object up. It rises and partly floats.

“Give me a place to stand on, and I can move the earth.” ----Archimedes

2) Charlie Darwin(1808-1882) British naturalist. The Origin of Species was published in 1859. It explained how plants and animals had changed over time to fit in with a changing environment. His book showed that people had developed from apes.

3) Gregor Mendel(1822-1884) Czech. The father of genetic. He grew pea plants and developed ideas on heredity (遗传) and inherited characteristics. Between 1856-1863 he grew 28,000 pea plants. He examined seven kinds of seed and plant characteristics and developed some laws of inheritance.

4) Marie Curie ( Polish ) (1867-1934) was born in Poland, moved to Paris and studied chemistry and physics there. She married Pierre Curie and together they studied radioactive materials and discovered radium. In 1911 she received the Nobel Prize in Chemistry. Her death in 1934 was almost certainly due to radiation in her work.

5) Thomas Edison(1847----1931) He was already an inventor of other electrical devices (phonograph, electric light bulb) when in 1882 he designed a system for providing New York with electricity from a central power station. This was a tremendous achievement, which had previously been thought impossible.

6) Leonardo da Vinci (Italian) (1452-1519)He was a famous Italian artist whose skill for showing human skin tones made his paintings seem to come alive. He used to study dead people in order to make his paintings as accurate as possible. Some of his famous paintings include “The Adoration of the Magi” and the “The Last Supper”. Later in his life he lived in France where he designed a submarine (潜水艇) and a flying machine.

7) British. He did research into different gases and discovered the medical value of nitrous oxide (laughing gas) as an anaesthetic.(麻醉药) In 1815 he developed a safety lamp for miners.

8) Zhang Heng ,Chinese( 78-----139) He invented the first seismograph to indicate in the direction of an earthquake. It was in the shape of a cylinder with eight dragonheads round the top, each with a ball in its mouth. Around the bottom were eight frogs directly under a dragon’s head. When an earthquake occurred, a ball fell out of the dragon’s mouth, making a noise.

9) Stephen Hawking,British(1942--- ) He has worked in astronomy and studied black holes in space. He has shown that black holes do not only absorb everything around them but, from time to time, throw out matter as well. This may mark the beginning of new galaxies. This is an advance on the old theory which said that black holes “eat” everything they come across.

Step 4 Pre-reading

1. (Pair work) What five most important qualities do you think a scientist should have? Give reasons.

clever/talented strict patient creative determined/strong-willed positive honest energetic intelligent/hard-working ambitious careful co-operative confident brave

2. (Group work) Ex2, p1

Do you know how to prove a new idea in scientific research? Discuss in groups the stages in examining a new scientific idea. What order would you put them in?

8)Draw a conclusion 3)Think of a method 4)Collect results 5)Make up a question

1)Find a problem 5)Analyse the results 6)find supporting evidence 7)Repeat if necessary

Step 5. Summary

Seeing much, suffering much, and studying much are three pillars (支柱，要素) of learning.

learning without thought is a labour lost; thought without learning is perilous(危险的)

3. To know the disease is half the cure. 找出病根等于医治了一半。

Step 6 Homework

1. Preview the reading passage John Snow Defeats “King Cholera”(p2)

2. Speaking task (p46) write some key words to the Qs to help your talk on your book and prepare to introduce the scientist you admire most to the class

3. Read notes ①--⑨ to Unit 1, p76-77

4. Listening exercise P41,Ex 1&2

Period 2 Fast Reading (P2)

Step 1 Homework checking p41 Listening

Step 2 Lead in

1.Invite 2-3 Ss to introduce the scientists they admire most to the class

2. Background introduction to John Snow

John Snow (1813-1858) was born and worked as a doctor in Great Britain. He was originally an anesthetist(麻醉师).He was so famous that he became the doctor for Queen Victoria at the births of her many children.Four outbreaks of cholera in the 1830s and 1840s killed many people in England. In 1854, the most terrible outbreak of cholera which ever occurred in the kingdom began. It was so violent and sudden that 127people died in the first three days.

3.Give information of the deadly disease cholera

1) What infectious diseases do you know? (AIDS, SARS, Bird Flu, grippe，pig-borne disease 猪链球菌)

2) What kind of disease is it ?

Name cholera

Symptom(症状) severe vomit (呕吐) and diarrhoea (腹泻)

Aftereffect(后果) die quickly from a loss of liquid

Step 3 Fast Reading：

Read the text quickly and find out the answers to these two questions and the main idea of each paragraph.

1）What was the cause of this disease ? 2)How did John Snow find it out?

Para 1: the problem Para 2: the cause----two theories Para 3: the method

Para 4: the discovery Para 5: the result and conclusion Para 6: the suggestion

Show pictures of water pump and teach handle

Careful reading: Read the text carefully and fill in the chart (Ex 1, p3)

Step 4 Discussion

1. (Group work) Discuss how John Snow investigate cholera. Put the stages in examining the disease in the right order.

Para. Stages in an experiment Examples in this investigation

1 Find a problem What cause colera?

2 Make up a question Which theory is correct?

3 Think of a method Collect data on those who were ill or died and where to get water

4 Collect results Plot information on a map to find out where people die or didn’tdie

5 Analyse results Analyse the water to see if that was the cause of the illness

6 Repeat if neccessary Find out evidence to confirm you conclusion

7 Draw a conclusion The water is to blame

2. P3, Ex2, Q3: Do you think John Snow would have solved this problem without the map? Give your reasons.

Step VI. Homework

1)Finish P4, Ex 1,2(on SB) Ex3 make sentences on exercisebook (make one’s way to, make up one’s mind, make sure, make room for)

2)Find out the phrases according to the Chinese (part 1 on the paper for language points)

3)Retell the story John Snow Defeats “King Cholera” by following the 7 steps on p1

4. Read notes to Unit 1, p78-79, find out some difficult points while reading the text

Period 3

1.Learn expressions & phrases

2.Learn.language points ：Difficult and Important Points:

1）Language points 2）The usage of “suggest & in addition”

Teaching Methods: Presentation & Practice

Teaching Procedures:

Step I Homework checking.

Step II. Expressions & phrases

1.know about… 了解……的情况

2.lift up 举起;抬起;提升

3.steam engine 蒸汽机

4.physical characteristic 人体的特征

5.put forward a theory about black holes

提出一个有关黑洞的理论

6. infectious disease 传染性的疾病

7. in scientific research 在科学研究上

8. examine a new scientific idea

验证一个新的科学思想

9. draw a conclusion 得出结论

10. analyze the results 分析结果

11. a well-known doctor 一个著名的医生

12. ordinary people 百姓;普通人

13. expose (…)to sth. 暴露(…..)在……中

14. the most deadly disease 最致命的疾病

15. terrified people 被吓坏的人们

16. get interested in sth./doing sth.对…产生兴趣

17. absorb sth. into… 把….吸收入….

18. gather the information 收集信息

19. determine to do sth. 决心干某事

20. a valuable clue 一条珍贵的线索

21. the water pump 水泵

22. in addition (to…) 除..…之外还有…

23. link … to … 将…和…联系起来

(be linked to…)

24. have it delivered (have sth. done) 叫某人送东西

25. die of… 死于…

26. announce with certainty 肯定地宣布

27. polluted water 被污染的水

28. prevent sb. from doing sth.阻止某人干某事

29. deal with… 处理……

30. solve the problem 解决难题

Expressions & Phrases (2)

1.come to an end 到了尽头

2.find the cause of this illness 找出疾病的起因

3.look into… 调查……

4.apart from…除…之外;此外 (=except for…)

5.prepare for… 预备好….

6.be strict with sb. 对某人严格要求

7.a revolutionary theory 一个革命性的理论

8.lead to… 通向…. ;导致… (注意:to为介词)

9.make sense 有意义

10. at times =sometimes 有时候

11. contribute to sth. 有助于;促进

12. encourage sb. to do sth. 鼓励某人做某事

13. point of view 观点

14. living conditions 居住条件

15. break… in/into pieces 把…摔成碎块

16. be devoted to sth./sb.专致于.; 关心;挚爱…

17. devote one’s life to doing sth. 献身于…..

18. curved line 曲线

19. achieve great success 取得巨大的成功

Step IV. Language Points

1.discover & invent

discover v. “ 发现” 被探索或被揭示的事物早已客观存在着.

Eg. 1)Columbus discovered America in 1492.哥伦布于1492年发现了美洲.

2)Who discovered radium? 谁发现了镭?

invent v. “发明”,指的是发明原先不存在的东西.

Eg.Who invented the steam engine? 谁发明了蒸汽机?

2.who invented the way of giving electricity to everybody in large cities?是谁发明了把电带给大城市中的每个人的办法?

the way of doing sth.= the way to do sth … “做…..的方法”

She showed us the way of cleaning it.= She showed us the way to clean it.她教给我们清洗它的办法.

the way引导的定语从句的引导词有三种, 可以用that;可以用in which;还可以省略.

Eg.I don’t like the way (that / in which) you speak to your father.

我不喜欢你跟你父亲讲话的方式.

与way相关的短语:

by the way 顺便说 by way of … 通过……的方法，经，由

lose one’s way 迷路 no way (俚语) 没门,别想

feel one’s way 摸黑走,谨慎从事 on one’s way to…在去…的路上

in this way=by this means=with this method用这种方法

3.Who put forward a theory about black holes?谁提出了黑洞的理论?

put forward

(1) to offer (an idea, suggestion etc.) for consideration 提出(建议等)

(2)推荐某人或自己任职位;提名

Eg.May I put your name forward as our monitor? 我能否提名你当我们的班长?

put away 抛弃;舍弃 put down 写下来;记入名单;

put on 穿上;戴上;增加 put off 耽误;延期

put out 熄灭(灯);扑灭 (火) put up 建立;建造 put up with… 忍受……

You can take anything from the shelf and read, but please ______ the books when you’ve finished with them.

A. put on B. put down C. put back D. put off

4.This was the most deadly disease of its day.

die (v.) dead (adj.) death (n.) deadly (adj.)

adj. (1).dangerous; likely to cause death 危险的;致命的 a deadly disease/weapon

(2). highly effective against sth. or sb不强有力的;致命的 a deadly remark 击中要害的评论

(3)aiming to kill or destroy意在杀死的;不共戴天的: a deadly enemy不共戴天的敌人

adv. (1). Very极度;非常;十分: deadly serious 十分认真

(2). like death 死一般地: deadly pale 死一般苍白

5.But he became inspired when he thought about helping ordinary people exposed to cholera.

expose在句中是过去分词作后置定语,表示被动.意为“患霍乱的”.

如:The book written by Luxun is very popular.

expose v.

(1)to make visible 暴露 “expose ….to….” eg.He exposes his skin to the sun. 他把皮肤暴露在阳光下.

(2)to reveal the guilt or wrong doing of …揭露;揭发 eg.He exposed their plot.他揭穿了他们的阴谋.

I threatened to expose him ( to the police).我威胁要(向警察)揭发他.

expose to 使易受,使受 expose a fraud 揭穿骗局

expose sth. to the light of day 把某事暴露于光天化日之下

6. So many thousands of terrified people died every time there was an outbreak.每次爆发霍乱时就有大批惊慌的老百姓病死.

every time是连词,引导时间状语从句,意为“每次,每当”,如:

Every time I meet him, I always think of the things happened between us.

每次见到他,我就想起发生在我们之间的事情.

immediately, the moment, directly, instantly 等都可以作连词,引导时间状语从句,意为“一……就……”,

eg. 1)I will give the letter to him immediately I see him.我一见到他就把这封信给他.

2)I came directly I got your letter.我一接到你的信就来了.

7.The first suggested that cholera multiplied in the air without reason.第一种看法是霍乱病毒在空气中无缘无故地繁殖着.(Suggest 用法参考P43.4,并完成相关的练习)

8.absorb v. 吸收(液体);承受;承担 (费用等)

Eg.1)Use the cloth to absorb the spilled ink. 吸干撒的墨水

2)We will not absorb these charges.我们不能承担这些费用.

absorb…in/by..吸引.注意

eg.I was absorbed in a book and didn’t hear you call.专心看书

absorb…into…吸收…

eg.The big company has gradually absorbed these small companies into its own organization.

这家大公司逐渐将这些小的公司吞并了。

9.valuable

(1) adj. worth a lot of money值钱的;贵重的;有价值的

a valuable diamond 贵重的宝石 valuable information 重大的消息

(2) n. (常用复数形式) sth. that worth lots of money贵重物品

Eg. Mary kept her valuables in a safe. 玛丽把她的贵重的东西藏在保险箱里.

10.in addition adv. as well as 另外

Eg.1) In addition, the course also produces practical experience. 此外,这门功课还提供了实践的基础.

2) A number of people came to the zoo in addition to Peter and Paul. 彼得和保尔以外,还有许多别的人来到动物园.

Step V. Practice

Finish the exercises on P4 & P42.P43 Ex.3.4.5.

Step VI Homework Assignment

2. Ss raise Qs on some difficult points they found while reading the text

Deal with the Language points exercises with the help of the notes on the paper

Step 3 Homework

1. Finish P42, Ex 1, P43, Ex 3, 4, P44,Ex 1

2. Finish P4, “Discovering useful structures” Ex1 (explain)

3. Preview the notes of Grammar on the paper for language points

4. Review the words for tomorrow’s dictation.

Period 4

Step1 Dictation

Step 2 Homework checking

P42, Ex 1, P43, Ex 3, P44 Ex1

Step 3 Grammar

1. Look at the sentences carefully. Pick out the attributes& predicative of the sentences. Give reasons for why you divide them into these groups.

1) I was angry with him for keeping me waiting so long.

2) She is a beautiful young lady.

3) He got worried about losing the money.

4) Sally was so excited at the good news.

5) So many thousands of terrified people died.

2. Discovering Useful Structures ( P4 )

(1).Find more examples in the reading passage where the past participle is used as attribute and predicative.

1) Doctor John Snow was a well-known doctor in London. (attribute)

2) John Snow told the astonished people in Broad Street. (attribute)

3) He got interested in the two theories.(predicative)

4) Neither its cause, nor its cure was understood. (predicative)

(2).Teach how past participle used 过去分词(The past participle)用法总结

1.作表语: 1）The cup is broken. 2)The door remains locked.门仍然锁着。

3)She looked disappointed. 她显得很失望。 4)He was terrified at seeing this.

5)People from all countries are respected and different views and opinions are tolerated.

2.作定语：1）Polluted air and water are harmful to people’s health.

2）A broken cup is lying on the ground.

3）This is one of the houses built last year. =which was built last year.

4）I want to write about people addicted to drugs.

5）TV programmes and printed articles help people in other countries learn about China and the Chinese people.

3.作宾语补足语：可以带过去分词作宾语补足语的动词有：

1）see, hear, find ,feel, think, 等表示感觉和心理状态的动词

1） He found his hometown greatly changed when he came back from abroad.

2）He once heard the song sung in German.

3）Every thought the match lost.

4）Frnk Lloyd Wright found himself inspired by Japanese seashells.

2) make, get, have, keep 等表示“致使”意义的动词：

1. He’s going to have his hair cut.

2. She had her foot injured in the fall.

3. When you talk, you have to at least make yourself understood.

4. Please keep us informed of the latest developments. ( 请让我们了解最新的发展情况。)

5. Every great culture in the past had its own ideas of beauty expressed in art and architecture.

3）表示“希望” “要求”等意义的动词：

1） He won’t like such questions (to be ) discussed at the meeting .

2） I want this letter (to be ) typed now.

3）They ordered the film banned.（禁演）

4） They want their buildings constructed in a way to look unnatural.

4.作状语：

The trainer appeared, followed by six little dogs.

Once seen, it can never be forgotten. =Once it is seen,

Seen from the hill, the park looks very beautiful = When it is seen from the hill,

Given more time, we could do it much better. = If we were given more time,

Once published,(=Once it was published,) his work became famous for the absence of rhyme at the end of each line.

Fold in this pocket, (=As it was fold in this pocket,)the letter wasn’t found until twenty years later.

(3) Finish Ex 2 on P 5 “Complete the table with phrases that have the same meaning”(in halves, Ss should finish half of the exercises and listen to the others for the answers to the rest exercises)

(4) Exercises

Period 5

Step 1. Warming up

1.Get 1-2 Ss to report to the class information of Copernicus

( Who is he? What achievement did he make? When? …)

2. Background Supplementary: Background

Nicolaus Copernicus was a Polish astronomer (1473-1543). Born in Torun, he began his university studies in Krakow in 1491, where he studied canon law and Latin and Greek classics. However he also had an interest in mathematics and astronomy. After obtaining his degree of Doctor of Canon Law (教会法规博士学位)in Italy in 1503, Copernicus returned home to Warmia in Poland to serve as Canon (=priest) .

In 1530, Copernicus completed his great work De Revolutionibus (《天体运行论》).Copernicus knew that these findings would lead him into trouble with the Roman Catholic Church (罗马天主教教徒), so he was in no hurry to publish his theory. He only published it as he lay dying in 1543.

Though Copernicus did not live to hear of its extraordinary impact, the book which first suggested that the Sun, not the Earth, is the centre of the universe is now recognized as one of the most influential scientific works of all time.

3 Get Ss to give the names of the nine planets of the solar system .

Mercury Venus Earth Mars Jupiter Saturn Uranus Neptune Pluto

Can you use a good method to memorize them ?

My Very Easy Method: Just Set Up Nine Planets

Step 2 Reading ----Copernicus’ Revolutionary Theory (P6-7)

1. Fast reading: Listen to the tape, and find out the answers to the questions.

1). What did Copernicus think was the center of the solar system?

2). When did Copernicus publish his theory?

3) Why didn’t Copernicus publish his theory before he died?

2. Reading comprehension

P7. 1.Use the reading to help you draw the two theories of the universe.

Before Copernicus’ theory

A diagram showing the solar system with the earth at its centre

Showing Copernicus’ theory

A diagram showing the solar system with the sun at its center

Step 3. Homework

1 Revise the composition and hand it in tomorrow.

2 Revise the language points for tomorrow’s quiz.

Period 6 Exercises & Summary

Unit 2 The United Kingdom

Teaching Goals:

1. Get the students to know the information about the United Kingdom.

2. Encourage the students to talk out what they know about the UK and Ireland.

3. Help the students learn to get information by listening.

Teaching methods

1). Skimming & scanning methods to make the Ss get a good understanding of the text.

1. Discussion methods to make the Ss understand what they’ve learned in class.

2. Pair work of group to get every student to take part in the teaching-and-learning activities.

3. Competition and role-play method to arouse the Ss’ interest

Teaching procedures

Period 1

Step 1. New words study.

Get Ss read the new words from P93-94 by themselves.

Ss read the new words together.

T correct some mis-pronounciation for the students.

Step 2 Introduction of the UK.

Area: 244,820sq.km.

Population: 59,113,439

Languages: English, Kymric, Gaelic

Religion: Catholicism

Composing countries: England Wales Scotland Northern Ireland

Capitals: London Cardiff Edinburgh Belfast

Step 3. Warming up.: Ss compete in answering the questions as quickly as possible.

Step 4 Pre-reading.

Q: England can be divided into three main areas. Do you know what they are?

The south, the Midlands and the north

Step 5 Fast reading.

Ss read the passage within 4 minutes to find the answers to comprehending 1.

1 The Union Jack flag unites the flag of three countries in the United Kingdom, which country is left out? Why?

The country left out is Wales. It is usually assumed to be part of England

2 What three countries does British Airways represent?

1 England 2.Scotland 3 Northern Ireland

3 Which group of invaders did not influence London?

The Vikings didn’t influence London, it influence the vocabulary of the North.

Period2

Step1: Intensive Reading.

Ss Read the text carefully and divide the passage into three parts. Write down the main idea of each part.

Part1(Para.1-4): what England includes; about Great Britain; the UK.

Part2 (Para.5):the geographical division of England into zones; their similarities and differences.

Part3(Para.6): the cultural importance of London.

Step2. Teaching new words and structures

1.consist vi.组成；在于；存在于

常用搭配：consist of =be made up of 由……组成；由……构成

Eg. The team consists of four Europeans and two Americans.

The committee consists of seven members.

consist in=lie in在于； 存在于

eg.What does happiness consist in?

The beauty of Venice consist in the style of its ancient buildings.

2 puzzle 1)n. 迷；难题；玩具；迷惑（只用单数）

a Chinese puzzle（中国玩具）【比喻】复杂难懂之事

a cross-word puzzle（纵横填字游戏）

常用搭配：be in a puzzle about对……大惑不解

I am in a puzzle about the matter.我对这件事大惑不解。

2)vt. 常用搭配：puzzle sb./be puzzled with使……迷惑; 对……大惑不解

The question puzzled me./I am puzzled with the question.这个问题使我很迷惑。

3)vi. puzzle over苦思……

I puzzled over the question for quite a while.这个问题我想了好半天。

3.clarify vt., vi.解释；澄清；阐明

clarify matters澄清真相

The government has time and again clarified its position on equal pay for women?

政府已经反复阐明政府对男女同工同酬的立场。

His mind suddenly clarified.他的头脑突然清醒了。

4.convenience n.适合；方便

We bought this house for its convenience.

我们买下这所房子为的是它方便。

When and where will it suit your convenience for our next meeting?

“我们下次见面什么时候,什么地点对你方便?”

Please come at your convenience.请在你方便的时候前来。

常用搭配：for one’s convenience为 ……方便

for convenience’s sake为方便起见

at one’s convenience在……方便的时候

拓展：convenient adj. 方便的；便利的

Our house is convenient for the shops.

常用搭配：be convenient to sb. 对……方便

It is convenient for sb. to do sth.某人做……是方便的

Is it convenient for you to come tomorrow? 你明天来方便吗？

5.attraction n.吸引, 吸引力;吸引人的东西;引力

The idea of working for state-owned enterprises has little attraction to young people nowadays.

现时去国营企业就职的想法对年青人没有多大吸引力。

The tides are caused by the attraction of the moon for the earth.

潮汐是由月亮对地球的引力引起的。

A big city offers many and varied attractions.大城市有多种多样吸引人的东西。

拓展：attract v. 吸引

attractive adj. 有吸引力的

常用搭配：have attraction for sth. 对……有吸引力

attract one’s attention吸引某人的注意力

be attracted to sth.被……所吸引

6.influence 1) n.（常与on连用）影响力；感化力

My teacher's influence made me study science at college.由于我老师的影响，我上大学学了理科。

Many a woman has had civilizing influence upon her husband.许多妇女对其丈夫有影响。

2) n.（常与over, with连用）权力；势力

Will you exercise your influence on my behalf?你愿意运用你的权力给我帮忙吗？

3).vt. 影响

My teacher influenced my decision to study science.我的老师对我学理科的决定起了影响作用。

常用搭配：under the influence of受到……的影响

influence on/upon对……的影响

注意：influence 可以表示长期以来给人思想上以潜移默化的影响；还指影响力；而affect可指对具体事物的影响，或对人的思想感情产生了影响.

I was deeply affected by the news

我深深被这消息所感动.

7. You must keep your eyes open if you are going to make your trip to the United Kingdom worthwhile.如果想使你在英国的旅程有意义，你必须睁大双眼。

解读：1)句中的keep your eyes open和make your trip worthwhile都是“动词＋宾语＋形容词作宾补”结构。

He found the room open.他发现房间是开着的。

The rain made the ground wet.雨使地面浸湿了。

2)worthwhile adj.值得做的,常用于It is worthwhile to do sth./doing sth.中。

I don’t think it is worthwhile.我认为不值得做这件事。

It is worthwhile discussing/to discuss the question.讨论一下这个问题是值得的。

注意：worth, worthy 和worthwhile的区别

worth现在英语中被看作介词，因为它后面必须带名词或动名词。后接动名词时以主动形式表达被动的意思，接名词时须接表示价值、代价的名词。

worthy是形容词，在句中作表语或定语。作表语时，用be worthy of ＋n./doing sth. 或 be worthy to be done 结构。

This book is well worth reading.这本书很值得一读。

This dictionary is worth ten yuan.这本字典值10元。

The place is worthy of a visit/ being visited.这个地方是值得参观的。

This suggestion is worthy to be considered.这个建议是值得考虑的。

Step5.Exercise

单句改错

The foreigner tried his best to make his point be understood.（删去be）

They found a piece of rope with one end tying in a circle.（tired）

They both spent t he night locking in the room.（locked）

What kept you so exciting? （excited）

I noticed the traffic holding up after a bad accident.（held）

It is a great c_______ to have a cell phone.

Generally speaking, students are i__________ by their teachers in world ands actions.

Don’t interrupt me！I am doing a word p________.

I must _________（澄清） my reasons for not having attended the meeting.

To be honest, I can’t tell what the a________ of this famous painting has.

convenience2.influenced3.puzzle4.clarify 5.attraction

Step6.Homework

Write a short summary of the passage.

Period 3 learning about language and Grammar

Teaching goals

1. Learn about the appositive clause.

2. Identify noun clauses.

3. Enable students to use new words.

Teaching procedures

Step 1 Review the vocabulary and complete the sentences.

a. Students work in pairs first.

b. The teacher check the answers.

Step 2 Brainstorming

a. Review the text and present the appositive clause by asking questions:

1. What impresses you most in the passage ?

The fact that impresses me most.

2. What have you already known before reading the passage ?

I have known the fact that

3. Did you hear any news about Britain recently ?

I heard the news that

b. Collect answers as many as possible ,reminding students

of sentence structure if find errors.

Step 3 Grammar Explanation

a. Get students to identify the clauses .

c. Try to make students tell the differences between appositive clause and attributive clause by comparing the sentences.

1.The news that the plane would take off on time made everybody happy.

2.The news that is spreading around the airport is that a heavy storm is coming.

3.The suggestion that students should learn something practical is worth considering.

4.The suggestion that they are considering is that students should learn something practical.

c. The teacher offers explanation if necessary.

Step 4 Tell the function of the following sentences.

1.The idea that Great Britain is made up of three countries Corner ,Big Ben and the Tower of London is past.

2.The fact that Great Britain is made up of three countries is still unknown to many.

3.The result of so much French influence was that the English language ended up with many French words such as table, animal and age.

4.Some people feel that Wales is an ancient fairy land.

5.That most of these are now threatened and may disappear is a serious matter to the people in Britain.

6.They realize that it is of great value to record and teach them to the younger generation.

Step 5 Consolidation

Consolidate what have been learned by doing further exercises.

Period 4 Using language (Reading: Sightseeing in London)

Step1 Revision：What is London famous for?

Big Ben , London Tower Bridge, Hyde Park, etc

Step 2 New words study.

Step 3 Read the passage and answer these questions

1 Who built the Tower of London? When was it built?

2. Who guarded the Queen’s jewels? What kind of clothes did they wear?

3.What interested her most? What kind of line is it?

4.which places did she visit on the last day?

5.What seemed strange to her?

Step 4 Make a list of Zhang Pingyu’s tour of London and a comment on each place she visited.

sites of London comments

Day 1 1. Tower delight

2.St Paul’s Cathedral splendid and interesting

3.

Westminster Abby interesting

4 Big Ben famous and very loud

Day 2 Greenwich

famous and interesting

Day 3 Karl Marx’s statue

famous and interesting

British Museum

thrilled

Step 5 Language points

1. sightseeing n.& a.观光的 go sightseeing 观光 游览

sightsee v. 观光 sightseer n.观光客 游客

2. available adj.

1) (sth.)that can be used 可用的；可得到的

This was the only available room.

2)(sb.) be free to seen 可会见的

I am available in the afternoon.

He was not available for the interview.

3. delight n.&v. 愉快，乐趣，快乐

to one’s delight 令…感到愉快的是 delight sb. with sth. 用某物使某人高兴

delight in 喜欢，嗜好 take delight in 乐于，爱好

delighted adj. be delighted to do

1)I took delight in books.

2)To his delight, he passed the driving test.

3)She delights inbeing surrounded by admirers.

4.省略句：结构中的主语与主名句的主语一致时，可省略相同成分。

It looked splendid when first built!

当第一次建的时候它看上去很辉煌！

When first built=When it was first built

When asked why he was late , he went red.

Unless invited to speak, you should remain silent at the conference.

5.in memory of=in honor of 为了纪念

in celebration of 为了庆祝

eg: The museum was built in memory of the great writer – Lu Xun.

6.It is strange (necessary, natural, important, a pity) +that (should) +v. 虚拟语气（引导主语从句）

e.g:You can’t imagine that a well-behaved gentleman (should) be so rude to a lady.

It is strange that he know so much about me.

7.display n. & v. 陈列，展示，表露

on display 展览 on show 展示 =on exhibition

eg.The seller displays all kinds of fruits in the shop.

display one’s true feelings 表露自己真正的感受

8.thrill vt excite The film thrilled the audience

thrilling exciting a thrilling experience

thrilled excited

9.feel/be proud of 自豪（褒义） feel/be proud about 骄傲（贬义）

do sb proud 给人面子，待人客气 take pride in 以……为自豪

He takes a pride in his success.

He is proud of his success

Unit3 Life in the Future

Teaching Goals:

1. Predicting the good and bad changes in the future.

2. imagine the alien creatures.

Functions：

1. 做出预测（Making predictions）

Do you suppose that…?

Suppose that… I wonder if…

Do you imagine that…? I imagine that…

2. 猜测未来（Making conjectures about future）

Is it likely/ unlikely that… Possibly …

It is possible that … Most likely …

I’m sure… Probably…

Suppose that … Perhaps … Maybe …

Grammar:

1.过去分词作定语（The past participle as the attribute）

I followed him to collect a hovering carriage driven by computer.

Tomorrow you will be ready for some visits organized by computer.

2.过去分词作状语（The past participle as the adverbial）

Worried about the journey, I was unsettled for the first few days.

Confused by the new surroundings, I was hit by the lack of fresh air.

本单元以life in the future 为中心话题，旨在通过本单元的学习， 让学生大胆发挥想象， 对人类今后的生活环境，生活方式进行猜测， 提倡环保生活意识， 同时让学生学会过去分词作定语和作状语的不同用法， 最后让学生将本单元所讨论的话题和推测手法结合， 学习怎么样写report

本单元所涉及的要点有：

1. 学习并了解未来生活的各个方面用与现在生活的不同之处， 学习外星人的生活方式。

2）学习表示预测，建议的的句型。

（3）学习过去分词作定语和状语的结构。

（4）学习写好“report”,以训练学生的逻辑思维及写作能力.

Period 1

Teaching Aims:

1. Learn some new words and expressions.

2. Help the students to talk about life in the past, at present and in the future.

3. Enable the students to describe the life in the past, at present and in the future.

Difficult and Important Points:

Compare life in the past, at present and in the future

What is life in the future like? What changes will take place?

Teaching Methods:

1. First and careful reading,

2. Asking and answering question activity

3. Individual, Pair work & group work

Teaching Procedures:

Step 1 warming up

Talk about how many changes there have been in the last one thousand years. And what changes we might expect to find in the next one thousand years

Step 2: pre-reading

1.Can you tell what problems people are facing today?

2.what problems do you think people in the future will have overcome?Which ones will still be there or even

worse in AD3005?

Key: 1The problem of population will be solved,have begun to Control the birth rate.

2The problems will be still there,and will even worse.

3I don’t think so.Now scientists are trying their best to

develop new resources that human beings can make use of ,such as solar energy.In my opinion……

step 3： fast reading

Read the text for the first time and tell what the text is about?

It’s an e-mail written by a man Who has taken up a trip to the future.

2. Look at the following sentence, there are in wrong order, tell me the correct order for these sentence

A. We were transported into the future by a comfortable time capsule.

B. I arrived a t Wang Ping’s home and everything in his house made me surprised.

C.I won a travel to the year AD3005

D. I have my first try to master a hovering carriage.

Step 4 careful reading

1.why did I have the chance to travel to the year AD3005?

2. What is a “ time lag”?

3. How did I feel when I was in the capsule?

4who guides my trip?

5.why did my guide give me some tables?

6.who transported us to the future?

Key 1. I took up the prize I won the year before.

2. “Time lag”means a person gets flashbacks from his previous time period.

3. The seats in the capsule are very comfortable.

4. My friend Wang Ping is my guide to the future.

5. The tablets could help me feel less nervous and uncertain

6. Wang Ping’s parents’ company transported us to the future.

1How did I feel as soon as I was transported to the future?

After the writer was transported to the future,he was hit by the lack of fresh air.

2.how did Wang Ping solve this problem?

Wang Ping gave a mask to the writer and hurried him through to a small room nearby to have a rest.

3.what do you think has caused this kind of problem?

Now we are causing more and more pollution to the nature,this will cause serious problems to life in the nature.This may be the cause of the lack of fresh air in the future.

1 What did Wang Ping’s house look like?

His house is a large bright ,clean room.It had a green Wall,a brown floor and soft lighting .

2 What was the green wall made of? What’s the purpose of building this kind of green wall?

The green wall was made of trees.The leaves of the trees will provide much-needed oxygen to the house.

3 How can you produce a TV set in Wang Ping’s house?

You can just flash a switch on the computer screen and a TV set will rise from the floor.

Good changes

Bad changes

Time travel Can travel to

Different times

as you wish After-effects of travel

transport .can move swiftly Disorganized, difficult to

find way

houses save living space Short of space

Towns Busy, look like

markets Easy to get lost

Air quality Own family

oxygen supply Poor quality in public places

Sample answers Ex.2

I think the writer has an optimistic view of the future.He was very excited when he traveled to the year AD 3005 an d couldn’t elieve if was true.From this,we can see he is eager to go to the future.Though ehe was hit by the lack of fresh air,

The 2nd period

Teaching aims:

Learn expressions & phrases

Learn.language points

Difficult and Important Points:

1）Language points

2）The usage of “take up and sweep”

Teaching Methods:

Presentation & Practice

Teaching Procedures:

Step I Revision

Have a dictation

Step II. Check the answers

1)eck the answers of yesterday’s homework (P42.Using Words and Expressions)

Step three language point

1. I still can’t believe that I am taking up my prize that was won last year

Take up 开始做，占用， 选修

a.When does the manager take up his job?

b.he has take up art in college

c.He decided to take p photography as his career.

开放思维：

Take off 脱下， 起飞 Take over接管

Take to 喜欢上， 对…产生好感

a. Helen always helps her mother even though going to school____most of her day

A.Takes up B.makes up C.saves up D.puts up

2.I have to constantly rub my eyes to remind myself that I have traveled to the year AD3005

我得不断擦拭自己的眼睛来提醒自己， 我已到了公元30

Remind: to make someone remember something that they must do

Remind sb about sth提醒某人某事

Remind sb to do sth

Remind sb that/ where/how

3. As a result, I suffered from ‘time lag”

As a result: because of something that has happened结果，由于…的结果

e.g He worked hard, and as a result, he got promoted quickly.

Suffer from: to experience 患有…为…所苦。

he suffer from headache.

发散思维：

suffering n. 痛苦，劳苦 sufferance n.容忍， 忍耐

4. This is similar to the “Jet lag” you get when flying. Bit instead it means you keep getting flashbacks from your previous time period.

这种病有些像乘喷气式飞机高速飞行时所引起的时差反应那样， 所不同是是， 它意味着你的脑海里不停地从以前的时间断地直往回闪去

Similar /Be similar to: 与…相似

A cat is similar to a tiger in many respects.

similarity n.类似，相似 similarly: adv 相似地， 同样地

b. Keep doing something: 继续做某事

It kept raining for a week

c. Flashback:闪回， 倒叙

The event in his happy family life are shown in flashback.

5.he was swept up into the center of them and my link with him was broken as I was carried up to top of a high building nearby.

Sweep up:本意是打扫， 清扫，经常引申为“横扫， 掠过”等意思

The leaves were swept up into the air by the wind

6.Wang Ping’s mother appeared, flashed a switch on a computer screen, and a table and chairs rose from under the floor as if by magic.

王平的妈妈出现了， 电脑荧屏上的开头闪了一下， 于是一个桌子和几把椅子就像变魔术般的从地板下面升了起来

Switch:n 开关 where is the light switch?

vi. 转换， 改变：

he got tired of teaching and switched to writing stories

开放思维： switch off 把…关掉， 不听， 不理睬

switch on: 接通， 把开关打开

Switch out: 关上

As if by magic= like magic

He jumped so high as if by magic

发散思维： magical: adj 魔力的， 不可思议的

Magically adv 迷人地， 不可思议地 magician n:魔术师

7. You may find it difficult as this is your first time travel trip

当你第一次做这样的时间旅行时， 可能会感到有些困难

Find it difficult: 结构为 “ find+宾语+宾补”

宾补可以是形容词， 不定式， 动名词， 从句

I found him to be much younger than I expected

Do you find him very bright?

I find it hard to talk with him

I find it very easy to learn English well.

Sentence patterns

Worried about the journey, I was unsettled for the first few days

Well known for their expertise, his parents’ company named “future tours” transported me safely into the future in a time capsule.

Confused by the new surroundings, I was hit by the lack of fresh air

Arriving home, he showed me into a large bright, clean room.

Exhausted, I slid into bed and fell fast asleep

Homework

Do ex 1 in page 19 in the book

Do ex 2 in your exercise book

The 3rd period

Teaching Aims:

Teach grammar (The Past Participle as the adverbial and attribute)

Improve the students’ listening skills.

Difficult and Important Points:

1)Learn the grammar(The Past Participle as the Predicative & Attribute)

2)Have the Ss sum up the function of the past participle using inductive method.

Teaching Methods:

1. Inductive Method

2. Group work

Teaching Procedures:

Step I Dictation

Step II. Grammar

Grammar

past participle used as adverbial and attribute

Complete the following sentences with the words given, using their proper forms.

1, I like reading the novels______ (write) by him

2. The girl ________(write) a letter is my cousin

3. There is something wrong with my bike and I have to get it __________(repair).

4.He spoke loudly in order to make himself ____ (hear)

Sentence patterns

Worried about the journey, I was unsettled for the first few days

As I was worried about the journey, I was unsettled for the first few days

Well known for their expertise, his parents’ company named “future tours” transported me safely into the future in a time capsule.

His parents’ company was well known for their expertise …

3. Confused by the new surroundings, I was hit by the lack of fresh air

When I was confused by the new surrounding, I was…

Arriving home, he showed me into a large bright, clean room.

When he is arriving home, he showed me into…

Exhausted, I slid into bed and fell fast asleep

As I was exhausted, I slid into bed and fell fast asleep.

过去分词作状语，意义上相当于状语从句， 表示时间， 条件，原因， 伴随状况等

Whenever praised, he blushed

United, we stand, divided, we fall

Written in a hurry, the book is full of errors

Although born in Germany, John lives and works in U.S.A

PAGE 20, EX 2

1. Frightened by the loud noise, I went to see what was happening.

2. Hit by the lack of fresh air, he got a bad headache,

3. Tired after the long journey, I still enjoyed meeting the aliens on the space station

4. Frightened by the noise outside, the little girl dared not sleep in her bedroom.

5. Built in 1910, the museum is almost 100 years old.

6. Given some advice by the famous scientist, the student was not worried about his scientific experiment any more.

Pick out two more sentences from the reading with pp used as the attribute.

1. His parent’s company named “future tours” transported me safely into the future in a time capsule.

2. Tomorrow you will be ready for some visits organized by the company

3. He became inspired when he thought about helping ordinary people exposed to cholera.

Ex 4

1.Soon we lost sight of that famous astronomer called Li Qiang

2.I am going to buy a painting copied from Vincent van Gogh

3.I like that old private house built of wood and mud

4.The room connected to the rest fot he house by a long passage is completely empty

5. The queen was sitting in a royal carriage drawn by four horses.

6. The vehicle mentioned in the book is unknown to me

7. The castle built in 1432 is under repair

Page Ex1

1.Well-known for his books about South, JM Coetzee won the Booker Prize

2.A princess once owned a magical chair made of gold and silver

3.On his birthday he received a mysterious present wrapped in gold silver

4. Interrupted by the bell, he was unable to finish his speech

5. Awakened by a noise at midnight, she saw a thief in her room

6.Supposed to be locked, this door is now wide open and the room is empty.

Ex 2.

Called

Endangered pointed

Known

Fallen

Supported

Terrified

The 4th Period

Teaching Aims:

Improve the students reading skills.

Learn something about I have seem amazing things

Difficult and Important Points:

1)Reading Comprehension

2) write a report

Teaching Methods:

Comparative method

Teaching Procedures:

Step1 xtensive reading

Name of creature Mu-mu Dimpods

Size Tall and thin Small

appearance

Black and white face,

a pointed head,

shell-covered leg Like a little cat

colour Black and white face Blue or purple

personality Very friendly Interesting and lively

Numbers of arms Six Too many to tell

Numbers of legs One long leg

covered by shell To many to tell

How it moves Slowly and

from side to side Skip around fast

voice Whisper shout

Food Mixture of carrot

juice and cocoa Lemonade with herbs

Step2 group work

Create a new alien and fill in the blanks then draw it out

Name of creature Moddock

Size Small child when grown

Appearance Very large nose and hairy body

Color grey

Personality Slow and shy but friendly once approached

Number of arms Six

Number of legs six

How it moves Rolls over and over like a ball

Voice Uses sign language

food oil

With your partner, draw a picture of your alien.

Then write a description based on your drawing and the notes in the chart.

Step 3 extensive reading 2 Rising to a challenge

Paragraph 1

Silver adventure:

Advantages:

Paragraph 2:

Problem existed in the past:______________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________

Now solved by________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________

What can Saturation City provide?

Paragraph 3:_________________

Paragraph 4:_________________

Paragraph 5:_________________

Teaching procedures

Step 1 Revision

1 Check the homework exercises.

2 Ask the Ss a few random questions to revise future time and introduce the topic of the unit. For example: What lessons do you have this afternoon / tomorrow? Are you going to do anything special this evening? What do you think the weather will be like tomorrow? What are you going to do on Saturday evening? Are you planning to do anything on Sunday?

Step 2 Presentation

S. Ask questions about the picture (in PPT.), and get Ss to tell you what they think is happening. Teach the new words majority, goods, industry. Read the introduction aloud.

Step 3 Reading

Say Now read the dialogue silently and find out this information: What is being planned at this company? Allow the Ss a few moments to carry out the task. Check the answer. (A new factory may be built.) See if the Ss can guess the meaning of out of work.

Step 4 Dialogue

Play the tape of the dialogue for the Ss to listen and follow. Go through the dialogue briefly and make sure the Ss understand it. Ask questions like these: What are people at the company talking about? Who is going to make the decision? Why does the company need to build a new factory? What is the difficulty? Why do some people want the new factory to be built? Why are some people against the new factory? Explain that may have plans expresses uncertainty about the future. Play the tape again. This time the Ss listen and repeat. Then let the Ss practice the dialogue in pairs. You may wish to ask one pair to act the scene in front of the class.

Notes:

a People have been talking of it a lot recently.:

Note the Present Perfect Continuous Tense to express an activity which started in the past and is still continuing.

b I simply don‘t know. = I honestly don’t know.

c Right now = At this moment

d The problem is … it. = Finding land for building the new factory is a problem ( i.e. difficult).

e The majority of people = Most people

f a number of people = quite a lot of people

g out of work = do not have jobs

h But some people … built on. = Some people do not want them to build a factory on good farm land. Note the structure not want something to be done.

i I can see the problem. = I understand the problem.

j is likely to happen = will probably happen

k It‘s quite likely: Quite emphasizes likely and increases the possibility.

Step 5 Practice

Demonstrate how to make sentences from the table, and then get a few Ss to make example sentences. Then let the Ss do this exercise in pairs. At the end get Ss to write down 5 sentences from this table in their exercise books.

Step 6 Workbook

After Ex. 1 is done orally, get the Ss to write the answers in their exercise books.

Both Exx. 2 and 3 should be done in pairs first. Then check the answers with the class. Get Ss to translate the sentences into Chinese and ask them to think if they will be able to put them back into English. Pay attention to the sentence structures.

When doing Ex. 4, warn the Ss not to do word for word translation. Special attention should be paid to the sentence patterns and word order.

Step 7 Consolidation

With a good class you can give the Ss the following phrases and get them to make up a dialogue. Write these phrases on the Bb.

I believe you’re right.

What are the problems then?

What do you think is likely to happen?

Write them up on the Bb and demonstrate with a good S how it is possible to make up a dialogue.

A: I think the company will buy more land.

B: I believe you‘re right.

A: But it isn’t likely that the manager will make a decision soon.

B: What are the problems then?

With an ordinary class, just practice the dialogue in Part 1 again.

Homework

Finish off the Workbook exercises.

Unit 4 Making the news

一. 教学目标 (Teaching aims)

1. 能力目标 (Ability aim)

Enable the Ss to recognize the variety of jobs there are in newspapers and what is needed to work in a newspaper office.

Enable the Ss to know what is needed to become a reporter and how to conduct an interview.

2.. 语言目标 (Language aim)

重点词汇和短语

occupation, do research, on one’s own, cover, concentrate on, acquire, accuse…of, so as to, scoop

重点句子

1) Not till you are more experienced!

2) You’ll find your colleagues very eager to assist you and if you are interested in photography, it may be possible for you to concentrate on that later on.

3) Not only am I interested in photography, but I took a course at university, so it’s actually of special interest to me.

4) Only if you ask many questions will you acquire all the information you need to know.

5) We say a good reporter must have a “nose” for a story.

6) This is a trick of the trade.

7) Have you ever had a case where somebody accused your reporters of getting the wrong end of the stick?

8) Perhaps I too will get a scoop!

二. 教学重难点 (Teaching important points)

Know what is needed to become a reporter and how to conduct an interview

三. 教学方法 (Teaching method)

Fast reading; Task-based method & discussion

四. 教学步骤 (Teaching procedure)

Period 1

Step I Lead in.

1. Where can we get the news?

Newspaper, TV, radios, website, magazines, mobile phones, etc

2. What are the advantages of newspaper over other means of news medias?

Step 2 Warming up.

1. Can you tell some jobs in a newspaper company? What are their jobs involves?

Types of jobs What it involves

Reporter/ journalist Interview people or finds out events from onlookers

Photographer Takes photos of important people or events

Editor Makes sure the writing is clear, concise and accurate, check facts

Designer Lays out the articles and photographs

Printer Prints the newspaper

2. Do you know what’s the press of making a newspaper?

The chief editor hold a meetimg.

Journalists interview people and write stories

Photographers take photographs

Photo are quickly developed

Editors check the report.

Editors write the headline

The newspapers are printed.

The newspapers are delivered by train and truck.

Step III Pre-reading

T: Get the students discuss the importance of qualities a good news reporter needs to have. And why?

Step IV Reading

1. Listen to the tape and do the True or False questions.

1) Zhou can go out on a story immediately (F)

2) Zhou took a notebook,a pen,a camera with himself. (T)

3 While interviewing, the reporter would just ask the questions prepared before hand.(F)

4) Zhou took a course of photography at mid-school. (F)

5) Zhou is very enthusiastic. (T)

2. Read the passage and answer the following questions.

1) When can he go out on a story on his own?

2) A good reporter must have a “nose”, what does it mean?

3) What mistakes must he avoid?

4) Why is listening so important?

Step V Divide the dialogue into three parts, and write down the main idea of each section.

Part 1: To work in a team

Part 2: how to get an accurate story

Part 3: how to protect a story from accusation

Period 2. Language points:

1 occupation

(1) job / employment 工作/ 职业

Please state your name , age and occupation

(2) period of time during which a house ,country ,etc, is occupied

They have a five-year occupation of the farm .

他们对该农场有五年的占用期.

2 fill in

Don’t forget to fill in your boarding cards. (填写)

Let me fill you in on what’s been happening in the office over lunch . (向 …提供最新消息)

We have got some time to fill in before the show . Let’s go for a drink .( 消磨( 打发)时间)

Sally’s off sick . Can you fill in for her for a month. (临时替代 )

3 reporter : journalist

an on-the –spot reporter 现场记者

It ‘s reported that … 据报道

report sb 告发某人

report to sb 向某人汇报

4 personality

(1) characteristics and qualities of a person seen as a whole 人格/ 个性

She has a very strong personality .

(2)u/cn distinctive , esp socially attractive ,qualities 特色

We need a person with a lot of personality to organize the party .

(3) cn famous person

A lot of personalities from the film world attended the party .

5 assignment

She was sent abroad on a difficult assignment . (task or duty that is assigned to sb)

The English assignment is a book report . (homework )

assign homework 留家庭作业

be assigned to a new post 被派到新的工作岗位

6 Never will Zhou Yang forget his first …

否定词放在句首,故用倒装把谓语的一部分位于主语之前.类似词有:no / not / never / little / hardly / seldom / scarcely / neither …nor / not only …but also / no sooner …than / hardly…when/ by no means / in no time

他很少去看电影. Seldom does he go to the cinema .

在我一生中还未曾听说或见过这样的事呢 . Never in my life have I heard or seen such a thing .

7 influence

have a good / bad influence on sb / sth 对… 有好/坏的影响

have (no ) real influence over sb /sth 对..有/没有真正的约束力

use one’s influence with sb 利用与某人关系的影响力

under the influence of 在…的影响下

8 go out on a story

on 加名词与come /go / set out 等动词连用可表示目的,表示去做某事

He is leaving for Shanghai on business tomorrow . 他明天要动身去上海出差.

她打算下周去北京旅行. He is go on a visit to Beijing next week .

9 Not on your own .Not till you are more experienced !

= You can’t go on your own ! You can’t go till you are more experienced !

on your own = alone / without help / excellent

I’m all on my own today .

Although her father was in the company ,she got the job on her own .

When it comes to maths , Mary is on her own .

by oneself 独立地/ 单独地

of one’s own 属于某人自己的

10 experience un / cn /vt

Do he has much experience ?

He had many interesting experiences while travelling in Africa .

learn by / from / through experience

a meeting to exchange experience

a man of rich /much experience

be experienced / skilled / expert in / at

11 The first time we’ll send you with an …

the first time , “首先,第一次”带从句表示“某人第一次干某事”,the first time 可引导时间状语,类似，the moment / the second / the last time / immediately / every time / directly 注意：从句中将来的事要用一般现在时 。

The first time , we should make ourselves familiar with the surroundings .

首先,我们应当熟悉一下环境。

The first time I came here ,I couldn’t adapt myself to the climate here .

第一次来这的时候,我不适应这的气候.

I’ll tell him about the matter the moment he comes back .

他一回来我就告诉他这件事.

12 Only when you have seen what he or she does …

Only if you ask many different questions will you …

Only+状语放在句首,主句倒装,修饰名词和代词,句子不用倒装.

Only in this way can you make progress in your English .

只有这样你才能在英语学习上取得进步.

Only when he reached school did he find out that he had left his textbook at home .

直到他到学校时,他才发现把课本落在家.

Only you can find out the truth .

只有你能弄清真相.

13 cover a story by yourself .

He has been sent to cover the conference. (report )

Cover the table with a cloth . ( place sth over or in front of sth )

Our city has a beautiful park covering 1000 mu (have …as a size / take up )

Is that word covered in the dictionary ? (4 include / deal with )

We covered about 30 miles a day . (walk )

Is the money enough to cover the tuition? (afford )

14 You find your colleagues eager to assist …

be eager for /after / about sth …热切/兴奋的情绪

be eager to do sth

be anxious to do sth 焦虑的心情

be anxious about sth

15 concentrate vt---- concentration n concentrated (adj ) 集中的/浓缩的/ 紧张的/

concentrate one’s attention on sth

concentrate on (doing ) sth

concentrate the / one’s mind

concentrate one’s attention on sth

concentrate on (doing ) sth

concentrate the / one’s mind

The threat of going bankrupt is very unpleasant but it certainly concentrates the mind .

即将破产的威胁虽令人极烦恼,但也能逼人开动脑筋.

We should concentrate all our efforts on improving education.我们应集中精力努力改进教育工作.

concentrate on 专心于…

16 …but I took a course

She took a course in philosophy . (n 课程,常与in/on 连用)

Our course was straight to the south . (n 路线/ 方向)

It was one of those ideas that change the course of history . (un 过程/进程)

The first course was soup . (一道菜 )

17 … of special interest to me

① of + 抽象名词 (interest / importance / value / use / help / benefit ) = be + adj

②of + (the same) size / weight / height / length / colour / kind /shape 等

这个会议很重要 .The meeting is of great importance. = The meeting is very important.

18 have a good nose for sth = have an eye for …/ have an ear for .. 有眼光/ 对..感兴趣

She has an ear for music .

A good reporter has a nose for news .

19 avoid : v keep oneself away from sb /sth ; stop sth happening / prevent

avoid ( doing ) sth

learn from past mistakes and avoid future ones (惩前毖后)

avoid one’s company (避免和某人往来)

Such kind of accidents should be avoided .

Though he made a mistake ,he wanted to avoid being punished .

20 Here comes my list of ….

here / there / now / thus / then 等副词放在句首时,句子全部倒装.

There goes the bell .

Now comes your turn .

篇5：unit 12 phrases(新课标版高二英语必修五教案教学设计)

science fiction科幻故事 What’s the distance from….to….从…到…的距离是多少?

make a sketch of…画草图 expect to do sth 期待做某事

develop one’s love for sth.对某事产生了爱好或兴趣 make/earn a living 谋生

take sth one step further把….推进一步. lay foundation of ….奠定了….的基础

long before 很久以前 before long 不久以后

set out to do sth. = set about doing sth.出发做某事 in one’s efforts to survive 在某人努力求生时

make an/ every effort to do sth.尽全力做某事 spare no efforts to do sth. 不遗余力做某事

without efforts 毫不费力 turn out (to be)结果是//prove

take sb on board 带某人上船/机 from that day on 从那天开始

take sb on a voyage across the ocean带某人去越洋旅行 give a view of …给人提供一个…的景观

dress sb in….给某人穿…衣服 sb be dressed in某人穿着…衣服

diving suit 潜水服 by the lamps of 在灯光下

ever since自从…起 keep sb as a prisoner// keep sb prisoner囚禁某人

cry about 为…而哭泣 go on an adventure 去冒险

contrary to ….与….正好相反 // on the contrary 相反 sink to the bottom of the sea沉入海底

become a permanent pain in one’s heart成为某人心中永久的痛

be driven by a desire to learn被学习的渴望所推动 look for/ search for/ hunt for 搜寻,寻找

look for a road without having a map自己摸索 dream of doing sth 梦想做某事

throw/ cast light on/ upon 阐明, 给….以说明 pioneer a new way 开创一条新路

unfold sth to sb把某事揭示给某人 the principle of life 生命的原理

the cause of life生命起源 nothing but= only 只有，仅仅

slow down 减速,减慢 eight feet in height/length/width 8尺高/长/宽

result in结果:导致 light the flame of life燃起生命的火花 a lighted candle

burn sth out 燃尽 come into one’s mind想到

make a choice of选择 turn sth upside down起大变化，颠倒, 混乱

have a strong belief in sth对…有坚定的信仰 wash sth up on the shore冲上岸

look down on// upon看不起… be about to do … when

cut off切断 be free from the pull of gravity摆脱地心引力

be proud of sth// to do sth为。。。感到骄傲

篇6：《文言文断句》 教案教学设计(粤教版高二必修五)

《文言文断句》 教案教学设计(粤教版高二必修五)

周亚飞

学习目标 1、断句练习

2、总结断句技巧和规律

教学重难点 重点：高考断句练习

难点：总结断句技巧和规律

前测内容

课前检测：

1.请全体同学上写；

（1班没有位置的在下面写）

2、点评：写得最好的同学，包括板演的认真度）

3、教师稍作总结

（预设如右

遵循先课内再课外，结合以前联系过的文言文高考试题中的部分段落作为断句练习的试题，从而总结断句的规律，也让学生在相对有些熟悉又不完全熟悉的基础上掌握这个试题的做题方法

活动方案：

1， 先给同学十分钟的时间把断句练习二中的前三个文段断开；

2， 在断句的时候，一定要坚信自己能做好这件事情，应当先诵读这个篇段，通过诵读，力

3， 求对全文的内容有个大体的.了 一、课前检测

《项脊轩志》第三段断句检测

导入：

师秀才

古时，有位秀才出了一张招生告示，报酬方面则写成s

“无米面也可无鸡鸭也可无鱼肉也可无银钱也可”。开学以后，秀才只收有钱人家的学费，穷人则分文不收。原来，穷人来读书，秀才就这样读s

“无米面也可，无鸡鸭也可，无鱼肉也可，无银钱也可。” 当有钱人家到来，则改成s “无米，面也可；无鸡，鸭也可；无鱼，肉也可；无银，钱也可。

二、断句练习：

五个句子如下

1、王戎七岁，尝与诸小儿游。看道边李树多子折枝，诸儿竞走取之，唯戎不动。人问之，答曰：“树在道边而多子，此必苦李。”取之信然

2、昔郑之间有躁人焉射不中则碎其鹄弈不胜则啮其子人曰是非鹄与子之罪也盍 亦反而思乎弗喻卒病躁而死

3、虞寄少聪慧年数岁有客造其父者遇寄于门嘲

之曰郎子姓虞必当无智寄答曰文字不辨岂得非愚客大惭

4、齐人有欲得金者清旦被衣冠往鬻金者之所见人操金攫而夺之吏搏而束缚之问曰人皆在焉子攫人之金何也对曰殊不见人徒见金耳

5、荆有次非者得宝剑于干遂还反涉江至于中流有两蛟夹绕其船次非谓舟人曰子尝见两蛟绕船能两活者乎船人曰未之见也次非攘臂祛衣拔宝剑，曰此江中之腐肉朽骨也弃剑以全己余奚爱焉于是赴江刺蛟杀之而复上船舟中之人皆得活

三、达标检测

1、永有某氏者畏日拘忌异甚以为己生岁值子鼠子神也因爱鼠不蓄猫犬禁僮勿击鼠仓廪庖厨，悉以姿鼠不问

活动方案

1、每小组一个同学上黑板，其他同学在本子上写

2、教师巡视，看各组情况

3、上黑板的同学左右互改，其他人小组内互改

4、点评，总结表现优秀的小组和个 解，凭语感将精力分析难断处，遵循先易后难的原则。

4， 每个小题选取2名同学上黑板展示，注意书写和断句的规律；

下面的同学及时观察黑板上的与自己的断句的不同之处，提出疑问；

在对比参照的基础上，选取相对断句不错的学生讲解他是怎样断的，有哪些注意事项；

5， 继续第4、5段地断句，时间为10分钟。

6， 选取4名同学展示4,5题断句；

7， 质疑与对比基础上，讲评；

三、断句规律总结

规律总结：

古文断句莫畏难，仔细琢磨只等闲。文段休问长与短，熟读精思是关键。内容大意全理解，始可动手把句断。联系全文前后看，先易后难细分辨。紧紧抓住曰云言，对话最易被发现。常用虚词是标志，更有规律供参看。习惯句式掌握住，固定结构莫拆散。词性词义要精研，语法结构帮助判。排比对偶与反复，修辞提供好条件；相同词语紧相连，一般中间要点断。题目做完回头看，根据要求细检验。

周亚飞

篇7：unit3 going places教学案一体化(新课标版高一英语上册教案教学设计)

I. General Goals for this Unit

1) words and expressions

prefer, would like, in space, in time, famous, experience, get away from, adventure, popular, instead of, get close to, expensive, equipment, simple, go for, tip, watch out for, normal, adventurous, basic, unless, see … off, say Hi to, on the other hand, find out, go hiking, arrive at

2) expressions for communicative uses

a. Asking for advice:

What time shall we meet?

Is it all right if we meet at six?

Where is the best place to meet?

What about meeting outside the theatre?

Shall we meet again tomorrow?

b. Responses:

Let’s make it at seven.

It’s all right to me. What about you?

Good. See you then!

I think it’s OK for me.

3) Grammar

The present Continuous Tense for Future Actions现在进行时表示将来

II. Some of the vocabulary words

1) means, mean, meaning

2) transportation, transport (v.)

3) vacation, holiday

4) basic, base (n.)

5) poisonous, poison (n.)

6) protect, protection (n.)

7) normal, abnormal

8) excitement, excited, exciting

9) adventurous, adventure

10) similarity, similar (adj.)

III. Language Studies

Warming up

1) consider 的用法：

I _______ ____ consider my ______. (得；计划) （加_______ 作宾语）

what (I am going) to say. (加________________ 作宾语)

Have you ever _________ _________ to Beijing? (考虑搬往) （加__________ 作宾语）

☆consider不能直接加不定式。但是如果consider后有宾语，那么该宾语后可以加不定式，构成consider somebody / something to 加动词的结构：

We consider Jack ___ ______ (是)one of the best students in our class.

（这句话的被动呢？Jack _____________________________________________.）

People generally consider John Baird to have invented the first telephone.

（被动：___________________________________________________________.）

2) means of transportation 交通手段/工具

means “手段、方式、方法”，单复数同形：

_________ means _________ been tried. (每种；已)

All possible _________ _________ ___________ tried. (所有的手段都已经试过)

如果表示“用…方式”，用by … means, 相当于in … way:

You can do this problem by this means.

3) How would you like to go to the places, by boat, by train, by air or by bus?

表示“乘交通工具”有三种方法：

①by + 纯名词（该结构作状语）：by air; by road; by land; by air; by plane; by sea; by spaceship等

这句话对吗？怎么改正？They by train to Shanghai. _______________________.

②in, on等 + 具体名词（状语结构）：in a car, in this car, on a bike, on his bike, on that train, on this plane

_____ you go to town ___ your brother’s car? （你是乘你兄弟的骑车去城里的吗？）

③take + 具体名词（作谓语结构）：

I took a boat / a taxi to the city. = I went to the city ____ ________.

Listening

1) Boarding calls 指“检票登机的广播通知”

board 动词，登机、船等：Please board the plane quickly.

2) flight number “航班的号码”，flight 指飞机航班，如：

He was ____ ____ __________ across the Pacific Ocean then. 当时他正在飞越太平洋的航班上。

Reading

1) simply 强调语气，“只是”，等于just:

He is doing _________ ______ (没干坏事); he ______ ______ (只是要) to play around.

You can learn to drive a car simply ___ ______ driving it often! 你只要经常试着去开，就会开车了。

3) get away from 从…逃脱，脱离

He tried to catch that bird, but it ___ ______ _______ him.

4) Yet there are other reasons why people travel.

reason why + 句子，是一个以why引导的定语从句：

Do you know _______________________________________? (你知道他为什么没有去party 的原因吗？)

I don’t know the reason _____ he _____ ______ for school today. (迟到)

4) instead of 是短语介词，后接名词、代词、动名词、介词短语等。

If you cannot go, he'll go _________ _____ you. 如果你不能去, 他愿替你去。

Instead of _______ (去) to Beijing, they will go to Shanghai this summer.

We’ll have tea in the garden instead of in the house.

Instead 单独使用是副词，注意位置：

If you cannot go, let him go instead. 如果你不能去，让他替你去。

I didn't have a pen, so I used a pencil instead. 我没有钢笔，因此我就用铅笔了。

We are not going to Beijing. Instead, we will go to Shanghai. (We will go to Shanghai instead.)

5) (get) close to 接近，靠近

At last, the plane was _______ _____ (能够) get close to the people who was in the __________ (burn) building.

He lives close to me.

Come and sit close to me.

6) nature 表示“自然、大自然”，不和the连用：

People generally enjoy the beauty of nature.

These years people are _________ ___ _________ (回归自然) for better air and better surroundings.

Nature还有“天性、本质”的含义：

Peter has a happy nature. Peter天性快乐。

Human nature人性

7) take exercise 从事体育锻炼

do morning exercises 做早操

You should often _______ _______, but not sit at your desk doing _________ all day. (你不能整天伏案做练习，而应该经常参加体育锻炼。)

8) equipment 是一个集体名词，不可数概念：

a __________ ____ equipment (一件)

The whole equipment for the lab has been shipped on site.

9) go for a hike “去徒步旅行”。类似的结构很多，如go for a swim, go for a walk等。如：

Let’s go for a swim in the afternoon! 我们下午去游泳吧！

有时也可用go hiking, go swimming等。

10) Hiking is fun and exciting, but you shouldn’t forget safety.

fun是一个不可数名词，不和a 连用：

He is fun.

Those games are great fun.

It is fun to go swimming in summer.

有关fun 的词组：

She dislikes ________ made fun ___ ____ public. (make fun of)

Have fun!

They are having so much fun! Don’t call them back. 他们玩得多么愉快！不要叫回他们。

for fun 当作玩笑；为了好玩；不是认真的

He writes just for fun, not for a living. 他写作仅仅是为了乐趣，而不是为了谋生。

funny滑稽可笑的

11) watch out for dangers 警惕、注意危险（的事情）

watch for 警惕或注意…:

Watch out for cars and buses when you are crossing the road.

Watch out也可单独使用：

Watch out! A car is coming near.

12) protect … from / against 保护…不受…的伤害

Wear ____ _______ _____ (一付) sun glasses to protect your eyes from / against the sun.

区别：prevent … from 和stop …from以及keep… (from) doing sth阻止…做某事：

The rain __________ us _______ _________ out. (大雨阻止我们出门)

13) paddle down rivers “沿着河流走”，当down作“沿着…”的时候，往往等于along:

He ___ _________ down / along the street ________ it began to rain. (他正走…这时候)

14) experience nature 经历/感受大自然

experience 动词，“经历”：experience difficulties / fear 经历困难/恐惧

experience作“经验”解时，是不可数名词：

He has _________ (丰富的) / __________ (很多) experience in teaching.

作“经历”时， 是可数名词：

She had a lot of unforgettable _____________ in South China.

15) fallen trees 倒下的树

正在飘落的叶子：________________ （地上的）落叶：__________________

发展中国家：_____________________ 发达国家：______________________

英语口语：_______________________ 笔头英语：_______________________

16) be careful not to do sth小心，不要做某事

Be careful not to touch that ___________ (run) machine!

Be not careful to do something 不小心做了某事：

She was _____ _______ _____ __________ the coffee cup. (不小心打破了)

19) go rafting “乘筏漂流”，该结构和go boating, go hiking一样。

20) similarities 相似（的人或物），单数是similarity, 形容词是similar, 可以构成be similar to 的结构：

You can clearly see the similarities between the two sisters.

Your idea is _________ ____ ___________ (类似与我的).

Language study

1) particular 特指的，特定的；挑剔的

He has his particular ____________. 他有他特别的兴趣爱好。

The story happened on that particular day. 故事就发生在那一天。

I'm not particular about my clothes; I don't mind what I wear.

我不怎么讲究我的衣服，我不在乎我穿什么。

2) go on separate holidays 去度各自不同的假

vacation, holiday 和leave 都有假的意思，他们的一般区别是：

vacation 是美式英语，既可表示长的，也可表示一两天的假日：

I’ll go for my __________vacation in Beijing. (暑假)

Holiday平时常用。当指较长的假期时， 可以用复数形式（但不一定）：

Do you have a holiday on Saturdays? 礼拜六他休息吗？

She usually stays in the South for her ___________ holidays. 寒假她通常在南方过。

Leave主要指事假或病假：

He had six weeks' sick leave. 他有六个星期的病假。

3) in a few days’ time “在几天的时间之后”，也可写成in a few days或a few days away，例如：

His birthday is in a few weeks’ time. = His birthday is in a few weeks. = His birthday is a few days away.

4) When are you off to Guangzhou? 你什么时候离开这里去广州？

Be off“（离开这里）去某地”，表示一种状态：

I must ______ _______ (得走了) now.

He is off in Beijing. 他远在北京呢。

如果表示动作“离开(这里)前往某地”，就用go off:

I’m going off to Beijing next week.

6) And say “Hi” to Bob for me. 代我向Bob问好。

Say “Hi” to = say hello to，“向…问好”，类似的结构有：

Say _______ to 向…道别 say ______ to不同意 say ________ to向…致歉 say _________ / ________ to同意

Let’s walk to the old scientist and say ________ to him. (打招呼)

7) In the past, people used to travel by horse.

Used to 指过去经常性的行为：

I used to _______ ____ ________(熬夜晚) when I lived in the country.

Did you use to get up late? = Used you to get up late?

You used to get up late, _______________________? / _______________________?

There _______ _____ _______ a school here, but now there isn’t any.

Integrating skills

1) eco-travel 生态旅游

2) a form of 一个…的形式

Going hiking is a form of travel.

in the form of以…的形式

He asked a question in the form of a letter.

form 也是一个动词，“组成”：

40 students form our class.

3) combine … with …

Combine this kind of medicine with that kind, and you’ll get something very special.

4) travel for pleasure “快乐旅游”，或travel for fun

5) on the other hand “另一方面”，通常与on the one hand连用：

On the one hand, we should work hard at our lessons; on the other hand, we also want to have a good rest.

6) find out “查明、弄清”，一般指通过努力查出事情的真相

Please find out _______ they are doing now. (做什么)

Find 找到丢失的东西：

________ you ________ your lost pen? (你找到了吗？)

Find 还可以表示人的感觉：

I find ________ I am doing something _________ (无用).

7) as well as “也，以及，又，还有”，注意该结构在句子里的位置

We learn English, as well as Chinese. 除了中文，我们还学英文。

He, as well as his two friends, ________ (be) there yesterday.

We learn Chinese, and English as well.

8) By staying at hotels in Red River Village, tourists can help the villagers make money …

by (doing) something “通过做某事”，通常表示方式：

__________ do you ________ by (saying) that? (你是什么意思)

___ ________ hard ____(通过在英语方面用功) English for all these years, she can _______________(交流) with foreign tourists freely.

9) take good care of

The old in China ______ _______ good _______ ______. (被好好地照顾)

本单元语法：进行时态表示最近的将来

英语中有一些动词可以用进行时表示将来的行为，这些行为往往表示按计划、安排等即将要发生的事。这类动词往往是一些位移动词，如：go, come, move, fly, stay 等。

My bother Bob is coming with me to the airport to see me off.

We are _____ (飞) to New York next week.

Mr Li is _____ ___ his ____ _____ this Friday.(搬迁)

How long are you staying here?

篇8：高二 Unit 12 全单元教案(新课标版高二英语必修五教案教学设计)

Teaching Goals

1.Talk about science fiction.

2.Learn to express beliefs and doubts.

3.Learn about Word Formation2.

4.Practise creative writing.

The First Period Warming up& Listening& Speaking

Teaching Aims:

1.Learn about some scientific facts by doing a small science quiz.

2.Train the students’ listening ability.

3.Develop the students’ speaking ability by talking about science fiction using the useful expressions for beliefs and doubts.

Teaching Important Points:

1.Train the students’ listening ability.

2.Master the useful expressions for beliefs and doubts.

Teaching Difficult Points:

1.How to improve the students’ listening ability.

2.How to finish the task of speaking.

Teaching Methods:

1.Free talk to arouse the students’ interest in science fiction.

2.Listening-and-answering activity to help the students go through the listening material.

3.Discussion to make the students finish the task of speaking.

Teaching Aids:

1.the multimedia

2.the blackboard

Teaching Procedures:

Step Ⅰ Greetings Greet the whole class as usual.

Step Ⅱ Free-talk and Lead-in

T: Do you like reading novels?

Ss: Yes.

T: What kind of novel do you like best?

S1: I like reading detective novels.

T: Why do you like novels of this kind?

S1: Because this kind of novel is full of suspension and the end of it is often surprising.

T: Very good. Does anyone have a different opinion?

S2:I enjoy reading about science fiction.

T: Tell us why, please.

S2:Science fiction is often about the things that may be possible in the far future. It can help us develop our minds and imagination.

T:A good job. Sit down, please. Today we’re going to talk about science fiction.

(Bb: Unit 12 Fact and fantasy)

Step Ⅲ Warming up

T:OK. Now, look at the covers of the two books written by Jules Verne.(The multimedia shows the two books.)

T: Have you read them?

(Some say “Yes”,while some say “No”.Teacher asks two students who say “Yes” to stand up and say something they know about the books.)

S3:I have read the book “20 000 Leagues under the sea”.It mainly tells us a story in which Dr Aronnax, his servant and a Canadian whale hunter were kept as prisoners by Captain Nemo and then went on a voyage across the oceans by the Nautilus.

S4:The book “Journey to the Centre of the Earth” describes what two men experienced after entering the centre of the earth through a chimney in an extinct volcano, which lies in Ireland.

T: You’re wonderful! Have you read any of his books besides these two books? What are they about?

S5:I have heard of his book “Around the World in 80 Days”,but I haven’t read it. So I don’t know what it is about.

T: It doesn’t matter. If you’re interested in it, you can go to the library or surf the Internet to read it after class. Jules Verne lived between 1828 and 1905,so there were many scientific facts that he didn’t know or guess. Do you know the following facts? Now,let’s have a quiz to see if you know any better.

(Teacher uses the multimedia to show the following.)

1.What is the highest mountain on earth and how high it is?

2.What is the deepest point in the ocean and where is it?

3.Which is the longest river on earth and how long is it?

4.What is the distance from the earth to the moon? 5.How far is it to the centre of the earth?

6.How high are the temperatures near the centre of the earth?

7.What is the longest distance around the world?

8.How fast does a balloon travel?How about an aeroplane?How about a space shuttle?

T: Now, I’ll give you five minutes to write your answers on a piece of paper. After a while, you can check your answers with the screen and tell me how many points you get.(Five minutes later)Time is up. Have you finished?

Ss: Yes.

T: Now check your answers. (Show the answers on the screen.)

Step Ⅳ Listening

T: So much for Warming up. Now, let’s do some listening. Look at the listening part on Page 9.Listen to the tape and write down where, when and what Sam and Betty saw. Then according to the description you hear on the tape, make a sketch of the animal. Are you clear about that?

Ss: Yes.

T: Now, let’s listen to the tape carefully and finish the task.

(Teacher plays the tape for the students to listen. Then give the students a few minutes to fill in the chart and make a sketch of the animal as they saw. When they finish, teacher checks their answers and picks out one sketch of the animal drawn vividly by them as an example.)

T: OK. Let’s go on with the listening practice. Listen to the tape again and then finish Exercise 2.Before listening to the tape, you need to go through the questions and know what to do.(After a little while.)Are you ready?

Ss: Yes.

(Teacher begins to play the tape for the second time. During this time, teacher may pause for the students to write down the answers to the questions. At last, check the answers with the whole class.)

T: Now, write down five possible questions that other people may later ask Sam, Betty and Karen. First discuss in pairs and then write down your answers when you’ve finished. Exchange your questions with other groups.

(Students do as the teacher says.)

Step Ⅴ Speaking

T: As we know, science fiction is often about things we believe may be possible in the far future, maybe a hundred years later. For example, space travel may be possible in the near future. Because Yang Liwei went on a 17-hour travel to space by Shenzhou Ⅴ spaceship last year. But sometimes people doubt whether science fiction may come true. Do you agree with me?

Ss: Yes.

T: Now, open your books and turn to Page 10.Let’s look at the Speaking part. There are four dialogues about such topics, which are incomplete. Work in pairs to create dialogues. When you’re making the dialogue, you can use the expressions on the blackboard. (Teacher writes the following on the blackboard.)

I believe… I suppose… I doubt…

I’m(not) certain… I can’t imagine… It could be…but…

It’s likely… It would like… I’m sure that…

T :Now, look at the blackboard. The useful expressions are used to express beliefs and doubts. They’re helpful for you to create the dialogues. I’ll give you a few minutes to do them. After a while, I will ask some groups to act out your dialogues. Each group should choose a topic you’re interested in. Is that clear?

Ss: Yes.

T: OK. You can begin.

(Teacher goes among the students while they’re making their dialogues. It necessary, teacher may give them some advice.)

T:(A few minutes later) Are you ready?

Ss: Yes.

T: OK. Which group would like to act out your dialogue?

(Two students stand up and act out their dialogue before the class.)

T: Thank you for your good performance. Please go back to your seats. Which group has made a different dialogue?

(Another two students stand up and their topic is about life in 3098.)

(Teacher at least asks four groups to act out their dialogues before the class, and their topics should be different from each other’s.)

Step Ⅵ Summary and Homework

T: In this class, we’ve talked about science fiction and done some listening and speaking practice. When talking about science fiction, we have done a science quiz to help us learn more about some scientific facts. In the speaking part, we’ve learnt to express our beliefs and doubts freely by making dialogues. Besides, we have also talked about an imaginative dream in the practice part. After class, according to what you’ve said in class, make a dialogue using the useful expressions on the blackboard. At last, don’t forget to prepare for the next period. That’s all for today. See you tomorrow.

Ss: See you tomorrow.

The Second Period Reading

Teaching Aims:

1.Learn and master the useful words and phrases.

2.Train the students’ reading ability.

3.Let the students learn about the French writer Jules Verne and his two famous science fictions.

Teaching Important Points:

1.Improve the students’ reading ability.

2.Master the useful phrases.

Teaching Difficult Points:

1.How to make the students understand the passage better.

2.How to help the students finish all the exercises in Post-reading.

Teaching Methods:

1.Discussion before reading to make students learn more about some scientific facts.

2.Fast-reading method to get the general idea of the passage.

3.Careful-reading method to get the detailed information in the text.

4.Discussion after reading to help the students finish the tasks in Post-reading.

Teaching Aids:

1.the multimedia

2.the blackboard

Teaching Procedures:

StepⅠ Lead-in and Pre-reading

T: Yesterday we talked about science fiction and also had a scientific test. By doing the exercises, we learnt some scientific facts. Today, let’s continue to learn more about scientific facts. Look at the pictures on the screen.

(Show the following pictures on the multimedia.)

T: Here are three great inventions. Who can say when the inventions in the pictures were made?

S1:Electric railway was invented in the early years of the 20th century.

S2:Thomas Edison invented the light bulb in 1879.

S3:Steam-powered boat was made in 1807.

T: You’re quite right

StepⅡReading

T: Yesterday, we talked about a famous writer, who is known for science fiction. Who is he?

Ss: Jules Verne.

T: Good. Do you remember the books written by him and talked about by us in the last period?

Ss: Yes.(Students say out the titles of the books together.)

T: Very good. Open your books and turn to Page 12.Let’s look at the reading passage. Before you read it, write down eight key words that you expect to find in the reading passage .Is that clear?

Ss: Yes.

(Students begin to write eight key words. After they finish, teacher says the following.)

T: Now, read the passage quickly to check whether the words you’ve written are all in the passage.

(Students begin to read the passage and then check their words. As answers are various, teacher may just check two or three students individually.)

T: Well, re-read the passage carefully to further understand it. Then answer the questions on the screen.

(Show the following on the multimedia.)

1.To make a living, what did Jules Verne have to do?

2.What will many of the instruments in his novels remind the readers of?

3.How did Verne lay the foundation of modern science fiction?

4.In his novel “20 000 Leagues Under the Sea”,what kind of person is Captain Nemo?

5.How does the story “Journey to the Centre of the Earth” begin and end up?

(A few minutes later, teacher asks some of them to answer the questions one by one.)

Suggested answers:

1.To make a living, Jules Verne had to write and sell stories.

2.They will remind the readers of Dr Benjamin Franklin’s experiment with electricity.

3.By taking the scientific developments of his day one step further.

4.He is someone you will neither like nor dislike. He is very cruel because he keeps Aronnax and others as prisoners and destroys ships. But at other moments, he is gentle and weak because he cries about the lost lives of people drowned in ships that have sunk.

5.The story begins with the discovery of an ancient document and ends up with them being shot out of a volcano in southern Italy with ever increasing speed and temperature.

Step Ⅲ Language Points

T: Now, you’re familiar with the passage. But I think the following on the screen should also be paid attention to.

(Show the following on the multimedia.)

1.make a living(=earn one’s living)

e.g. She made a living by singing in a nightclub.

2.lay the foundation of

e.g. Four-year college life laid solid foundations of his career.

3.come true

e.g. The boy’s wish to become a PLA man has come true.

4.set out

e.g. They set out to look for the lost child.

5.turn out(to be)+adj./n.

e.g. The weather man said it was going to rain this afternoon but it turned out to be very lovely.

To everyone’s surprise, the fashionable girl turned out to be a thief.

6.defend…against/from

e.g. We should defend our country against attacks.

7.be dressed in

e.g. The girl was always dressed in red.

Dressed in uniform, he looks handsome.

Step Ⅳ Post-reading

T: Now, read the passage again. Then finish Exercise 2 in Post-reading on Page 13.

(After a while, teacher checks their answers with the whole class.)

Suggested answers:

2.During the time they do all they can to continue to live…

3.They realize that they come to the surface of the monster

4.his long-term guests

T: Well. Now, please look at Exercise 4.In Jules Verne’s times, the knowledge about the earth was very limited, and many scientific facts couldn’t be explained by people. But Jules Verne contained a lot of knowledge about the earth in his novel. Where do you think he might have got his ideas from? You can use all the knowledge you have learnt to explain the questions. Work in groups of four to have a discussion.

(After a while, teacher checks their answers. Students may have various answers.)

T: OK. Let’s go on with the exercises in Post-reading. Under water travel and space travel have many things in common. Do you know the differences and similarities between them? Work in groups of four to finish the chart of Exercise 3.

Suggested answers:

Differences SUBMARINE SPACESHIP

Speed slow fast

Landscape under water landscape space landscape

Number for people a lot of people a few people

Food common food special space food

Clothes diving suits space suits

Similarities Demand for skills is high.

They’re both exciting.

Tourists must be trained by experts.

They’re expensive.

T: Well done! If you were going to climb down into a very deep cave, which tools and things would you bring? What would be the most important dangers and things that could happen? Work in groups of five to discuss the questions and then finish the chart in Exercise 5.Is that clear?

Ss: Yes.

T: OK. You can begin.

(Teacher gives them a few minutes. Teacher joins them in the discussion and gives some advice if necessary.)

Suggested answers:

Preparation: Tools and things to bring Risks: Dangerous and things that could happen

food, water, warm clothes, ropes, matches, a knife, a chisel, some medicines losing one’s way falling into a hole being injured

Step Ⅴ Summary and Homework

T: In this period, we’ve read a passage about Jules Verne. By reading, we’ve learnt more about Jules Verne and his two novels. We’ve also learnt some useful expressions and done some concerned exercises. After class, try to make more sentences using them to master them better. Besides, read the passage over and over and prepare for retelling it. At last, preview the third period-Language Study. Class is over.

The Third Period Grammar

Teaching Aims:

1.Review the new words appearing in the last periods.

2.Learn to use the rules of word formation to guess the meaning of the word.

Teaching Important Points:

1.Learn to choose proper words according to the contexts of the given passage.

2.Learn to guess the meaning of the words by the meaning of some stems and affixes.

Teaching Difficult Points:

1.Master the meanings of the following stems and affixes:

mis-=wrong extra-=outside inter-=between sub-=under

under-=below over-=too much dis-=not -marine=sea

2.How to guess the meanings of the words according to these stems and affixes.

Teaching Methods:

1.Review method to consolidate what we’ve learnt.

2.Practice to make the students learn and master these stems and affixes, and then guess the meanings of the words using what they’ve learnt.

3.Individual,pair or group work to make every student work in class.

Teaching Aids:

1.the multimedia

2.the blackboard

Teaching Procedures:

Step Ⅰ Greetings

Greet the whole class as usual.

Step Ⅱ Revision

T: In the last period we learnt a passage about a French famous writer Jules Verne. Now, who’d like to retell the text? (One student stands up and retells the text in his own words.)

T: Very good. It seems that you’ve read the passage again and again.

Step Ⅲ Word Study

T: In the last period, we learnt some new words. Now, let’s review them. Take a piece of paper and write down the words and phrases when I read them in Chinese. Are you ready?

Ss: Yes.

T: OK. Let’s begin.

(Teacher says the following words in Chinese and students write them down in English: collision, permanent, voyage, escape, on board, fiction, fantasy)

T: If you’ve written them down, make a short sentence using every word. After a while, I’ll ask some of you to read out your sentences.(A few minutes later)Have you finished?

Ss: Yes.

T: OK. Who’d like to make a sentence using the first word “collision”?

S1:The plane crashed after a collision with a tall building, killing all the passengers on board.

T: Very good. Next word “permanent”.Who will try?

S2:Love is a permanent topic for us all.

S3:Next month, he is going to go on a voyage across the English Channel.

S4:A thief robbed the young lady of her handbag and escaped.

S5:All passengers on board are not from the same country.

S6:He is fond of science fiction.

S7:Not all fantasy can be realized in the future.

T: Well done. Your sentences are very good. Now, please turn to Page 14 and finish the exercises in Word Study. First do it by yourself. Then check your answers in pairs. Finally I’ll check your answers.

Step Ⅳ Word Formation

T: As we know, learning the rules of word formation is one of the ways to enlarge our vocabulary. We can guess the meanings of the words using them without looking them up in the dictionary. Please look at the screen.

(Teacher shows the following on the screen.)

rewrite,unhappy,disappear,impossible,invisible,non-smoker,supermarket,worker,illness,movement,useful,action,cooperate,cloudy,musical

mis-=wrong

extra-=outside

inter-=between

sub-=under

under-=below

over-=too much

dis-=not

-marine=sea

T: Please look at the screen. Study the meanings of these stems and affixes in pairs and then try to give some examples with the stems and affixes.(A few minutes later)Are you ready? (Ss: Yes.) Now, I’ll ask some students to read out the words they’ve written. Any volunteer?

S: Misconduct, extraordinary, international, subsoil, underground, overcharge, disagree…

(Teacher writes these words on the blackboard.)

T: Terrific! Now, let’s do an exercise. Open your books and turn to Page 12.Look at Word Study, Exercise 1.Match the words and the correct definitions. I’ll give you two minutes to do it, and then I’ll check your answers.

T: You’re right. Now, let’s go on with Exercise 2.Guess the meanings of the words in italics, using context clues and what you know about word parts, and then translate each sentence into Chinese. First do it by yourself, and then check your answers with your partner. Finally, I’ll ask some of you to finish the exercise.

Step Ⅴ Consolidation

T: Look at the screen, please.(Teacher shows the following on the screen.)

Add a proper affix to each of the following words to form another word.

1.______curricular 2.______ dependent 3.______patient

4.______stop 5.______judge 6.______tired

7.______heading 8.______clothing 9.______advantage

Suggested answers:

1.extra- 2.in- 3.im- 4.non- 5.mis- 6.over- 7.sub- 8.under- 9.dis-

Step Ⅵ Summary and Homework

T: In this class, we’ve reviewed some new words appearing in the unit by doing exercises. We’ve also learnt some rules of word formation. By doing so, we can guess the meanings of some words without looking them up in the dictionary. After class, learn the affixes on the blackboard by heart, and look for some reading materials to try guessing the meanings of new words. Besides, don’t forget to prepare for the next period. Time is up. That’s all for today. See you next time.

Ss: See you next time.

The Fourth Period Integrating Skills

Teaching Aims:

1.Review the useful expressions learnt in this unit.

2.Review some word formation.

3.Train the students’ writing ability by practising creative writing.

Teaching Important Points:

1.Consolidate word formation learnt yesterday.

2.Help the students finish the creative writing.

Teaching Difficult Points:

1.How to help the students practise creative writing.

2.How to improve the students’ reading ability.

Teaching Methods:

1.Revision method to help the students consolidate the useful expressions.

2.Question-and-answer activity to help the students understand the reading passage better.

3.Discussion method to help the students finish the task of writing.

4.Individual,pair or group work to make every student work in class.

Teaching Aids:

1.the multimedia

2.the blackboard

Teaching Procedures:

Step Ⅰ Greetings

Greet the whole class as usual.

Step Ⅱ Revision

T: In the last period, we’ve learned some rules of word formation. Do you think knowledge of word formation can help us learn new words? Why?

S1:Yes.Because many English words are formed by adding affixes. So long as you know the meanings of some affixes, and word parts, you will guess the meanings of some new words without looking them up in a dictionary.

T: Quite right. Sit down, please. Now, let’s do an exercise to consolidate it. Please look at the screen, and then fill in the blanks.

(Teacher shows the following on the screen.)

1.submarine=______+______

2.disappear=______+______

3.overturn=______+______

4.Internet=______+______

5.underwater=______+______

6.prisoner=______+______

(After a while, teacher asks one student to do the exercise. Then teacher shows the answers on the screen.)

T: Good. Tell me the Chinese meaning of each word, and point out what the suffixes mean.

Suggested answers:

1.潜水艇 sub+ marine sub-=under

2.消失 dis+ appear dis-=not

3.打翻 over+ turn over-=too much

4.因特网 Inter+ net inter-=between

5.在水下的 under+ water under-=below

6.囚犯 prison+er -er=person who carries out the action of the verb

Step Ⅲ Reading

T: In the last two periods, we have learnt much about science fiction and known more about Jules Verne, the father of science fiction, who wrote many famous science fiction, such as 20 000 Leagues Under the Sea, Around the World in 80 Days, Journey to the Centre of the World…He combined fact with fantasy cleverly. Now, we’re going to read another passage about science fiction, whose title is the Story of Dr Frankenstein. Open your books and turn to Page 15.Read the passage quickly and then answer some questions on the screen.

(Show the following on the screen.)

1.What did Dr Frankenstein want to do when he was young?

2.After he was sent to university, what did he think of the things taught at university?

3.What attracted his attention?

4.Did he discover the cause of life?

5.Although he knew how to create life, what remained a difficult work for him?

6.Why did he decide to create a larger human being than man about eight feet in height?

(Teacher gives them five minutes to read them. After that, check their answers.)

Suggested answers:

1.He wanted to learn the secrets of heaven and earth when he was young.

2.He found all that was taught at university very disappointing and decided to pioneer a new way himself.

3.The structure of the human body and any animal that was alive attracted his attention.

4.Yes.

5.How to prepare a body for it with all its muscles and organs still remained a difficult job for him.

6.Because the small size of the parts slowed down his speed.

T:Now,let’s do an exercise.(Teacher shows the following on the screen.)

1.The boy ______ becoming a pilot.

2.______ before you reach the crossroads.

3.He shouted to ______.

4.The fire ______.

5.Can you ______ the problem?

6.He ______ meat with a sharp knife.

7.Her skin is ______.

T:Fill in the blanks using the proper phrases on the blackboard.

Suggested answers:

1.dreams of 2.Slow down 3.draw people’s attention 4.burn not

5.throw any light on 6.cut up 7.as white as snow

Step Ⅳ Listening and Reading Aloud

T: Now, let’s listen to the tape. First listen and repeat. Then read the passage aloud by yourselves. Pay attention to your pronunciation.

(Teacher plays the tape for the students to listen and follow. Then give them a few minutes to read. After that, ask some students to read the passage and correct the mistakes in pronunciation.)

Step Ⅴ Designing and Writing

T: We have read a passage about Dr Frankenstein, which tells us how Dr Frankenstein created a human being like us. In fact, one of man’s greatest dreams has always been to create life, especially a life form that looks like us: to create a man. Now, look at the screen. Please discuss them in groups of four.

(Teacher shows the following on the multimedia.)

1.How does your doctor create a life form that looks like a human being?

2.Describe your doctor’s efforts to do that.

3.Creat a word web of nouns, verbs and adjectives for the story. Add all the words you need.

(Teacher goes among the students to help them finish the word web.)

Suggested answers:

1.My doctor uses high technological skills to create a life form that looks like a human being, who has the advantages of human beings and animals, and at the same time has the features of advanced computers. It is a superman.

2.My doctor takes the following steps to create the human:

First, choose the cells of human body and fur and features of animals as materials.

Second, use the test tube and medicine to cultivate cells in the lab.

Third, on the one hand, arm the man-made human with culture and thought; n the other hand, put the machine which has the functions of storage, code, language…in the body of him.

Fourth, a superman is born.

3.T: OK. Your imagination is very good. Now, write a short story about how your doctor would create a human being according to what you’ve discussed. Before writing, read the tips for writing on Page 16.They will give you some help.

(The teacher gives the students enough time to finish the task and asks some of them to read their creative writing to the whole class.)

The Fifth Period Word Formation

Teaching Aims:

1.Review all the methods of word formation the students have learned and summarize them.

2.Do some exercises to enable the students to master what they’ve learnt.

Teaching Important Point:

How to enable the students to apply what they’ve learned about word formation to help them in reading comprehension.

Teaching Difficult Point:

How to apply what they’ve learned about word formation to guess the meaning of an unknown word.

Teaching Methods:

1.Explanation to make the students understand what they’ve learned clearly.

2.Practice to enable the students to master what they’ve learned.

3.Pair work or group work to make every student active in class.

Teaching Aids:

1.the multimedia

2.the blackboard

Teaching Procedures:

Step Ⅰ Greetings and Revision

Greet the whole class as usual.

(Teacher asks one of the students to read his homework and then asks some other students to check it. Then teacher discusses some of the answers with the students and corrects the mistakes the students made in their homework if there are any. At the same time teacher gives some explanation if necessary.)

Step Ⅱ Lead-in and Discussion

T:(Teacher shows the following on the screen.)Let’s do an exercise now. Look at the sentences on the screen. Please fill in the blank of each sentence with a suitable word according to the word given in the bracket.

Complete the following sentences:

1.These gold rings are ______ while those glass ones are ______(value).

2.We all like the report given by the famous scientist yesterday. It is ______(encourage).

3.Mary’s daughter is old enough to ______ and ______ herself.(dress)

4.We were on duty yesterday. But after school we couldn’t find Jack. Tom said that he was ______(self) and must go home.

5.______(self) is a virtue of the Chinese people.

6.He lost his keys. He is ______.I’m sure he will be ______ with everything from now on.(care)

7.At the beginning the Blacks in the US had no right to vote. It was ______(fair).

8.That plan was a waste of money. We ______(agree) with it.

(Teacher goes into the students and has a discussion with them. After a few minutes.)

T: Have you finished?(Ss: Yes.)Now give us your answers please. Volunteer! One student, one answer.

S1:In the first sentence, we should fill “valuable and valueless” in the blanks according to the meaning of the sentence. Am I right?

Ss: Yes, you are right.

S2:The second answer is “encouraging”,I think.

S3:I’ll try the third sentence. I think “dress” and “undress” should be filled in.

S4:The fourth. It is the word “selfishness” that is suitable for this sentence. Am I right?

S5:I can’t agree with you. Here an adjective is needed.“Selfish” is right in this sentence, I believe.

T: Which is right,S4or S5?

S6:I think S5 is right. A word ending with “-ness” is a noun, not an adjective.

T: Is he right?

Ss: Yes, he is right.

T: Please go on!

…

Suggested answers:

5.Unselfishness

6.careless;careful

7.unfair

8.disagreed

Step Ⅲ Further Discussion

T: Do you like the exercise?(Ss: Yes.)Just now we reviewed a method of word formation. I’m glad you like it. There are four methods of word formation. The first is Clipping or Shortening. For example, telephone→phone; examination→exam; refrigerator→fridge; television→TV; the Chinese Communist Party→CCP etc. Who can give us some other examples?

S7:aeroplane→plane; bicycle→bike; mathematics→maths; very important person→VIP; the United States of America→the US.

S8:photograph→photo; laboratory→lab;October→Oct.; November→Nov.; United Nations→UN

T: So much for this. Now I’ll tell you that the second method of word formation is common.It is conversion.(Show the following on the screen.)Look at the sentences on the screen.Who can tell us the difference between the underlined words in each group of sentences?

Compare the following sentences:

1.a.It has not much taste.

b. The bread tastes delicious.

2.a.They had a quarrel yesterday.

b. They quarrelled for half an hour last night.

3.a.I’ve got an interview with National Chemicals.

b. We interviewed 20 people for the job.

S9:In each group of the sentences, the words underlined belong to the different part of speech. The word in the first sentence is a noun while the other is a verb.

T: That’s right. This method of word formation, Conversion, is to use a form that represents one part of speech as another part of speech without changing the form of the word. The process of creating new words without adding any affixes is also called zero-derivation

Step Ⅴ Test

T: Now let’s have a test.(Show the following on the screen.)Please write your answers on a piece of paper. A few minutes later, we’ll check the answers.

Can you tell us the meaning of the underlined word in each sentence?T ry to guess them.

1.The hall can seat a thousand people.

2.The train slowed down.

3.They helped us bridge over the difficulties.

4.We must better the life of the people.

5.His holiday was ruined by a series of misadventures.

6.There is often subzero temperature in winter here.

7.I disbelieve every word Tom says.

8.He is extra-thin.

9.The article has a subtitle.

Suggested answers:

1.坐 2.慢了下来

2.度过 4.改善

5.不幸事件 6.零度以下

7.不相信 8.相当瘦

9.小标题

Step Ⅵ Summary and Homework

T: In this class we’ve reviewed the four methods of word formation and some useful affixes…(Teacher writes all of these on the blackboard.)To master some knowledge of word formation is very important. It can not only help to improve our ability to read English articles but also help us remember new words. I say, it is a useful tool in helping us study English. Let’s work hard at it. Today’s homework: Collect as many prefixes as you can and divide them into groups according to their meanings. So much for this class. Good-bye!

Ss: Good-bye!

The computer is a wonderful machine. Today most computers have a memory. That means information can be stored in them and be taken out any time when it is needed. So computers are used a lot in many ways.

Scientists are trying to make computers smaller and smaller so that they can be easily used. Computers have worked faster and faster now.

Computers can do many kinds of work. They can be used in doing business work, in scientific research work and in science of medicine. We can see them in some large factories, even in many homes. They have become popular indeed.

The computer is a wonderful machine. Today most computers have a memory. That means information can be stored in them and be taken out any time when it is needed. So computers are used a lot in many ways.

Scientists are trying to make computers smaller and smaller so that they can be easily used. Computers have worked faster and faster now.

Computers can do many kinds of work. They can be used in doing business work, in scientific research work and in science of medicine. We can see them in some large factories, even in many homes. They have become popular indeed.

The computer is a wonderful machine. Today most computers have a memory. That means information can be stored in them and be taken out any time when it is needed. So computers are used a lot in many ways.

Scientists are trying to make computers smaller and smaller so that they can be easily used. Computers have worked faster and faster now.

Computers can do many kinds of work. They can be used in doing business work, in scientific research work and in science of medicine. We can see them in some large factories, even in many homes. They have become popular indeed.

The computer is a wonderful machine. Today most computers have a memory. That means information can be stored in them and be taken out any time when it is needed. So computers are used a lot in many ways.

Scientists are trying to make computers smaller and smaller so that they can be easily used. Computers have worked faster and faster now.

Computers can do many kinds of work. They can be used in doing business work, in scientific research work and in science of medicine. We can see them in some large factories, even in many homes. They have become popular indeed.

The computer is a wonderful machine. Today most computers have a memory. That means information can be stored in them and be taken out any time when it is needed. So computers are used a lot in many ways.

Scientists are trying to make computers smaller and smaller so that they can be easily used. Computers have worked faster and faster now.

Computers can do many kinds of work. They can be used in doing business work, in scientific research work and in science of medicine. We can see them in some large factories, even in many homes. They have become popular indeed.

The computer is a wonderful machine. Today most computers have a memory. That means information can be stored in them and be taken out any time when it is needed. So computers are used a lot in many ways.

Scientists are trying to make computers smaller and smaller so that they can be easily used. Computers have worked faster and faster now.

Computers can do many kinds of work. They can be used in doing business work, in scientific research work and in science of medicine. We can see them in some large factories, even in many homes. They have become popular indeed.

The computer is a wonderful machine. Today most computers have a memory. That means information can be stored in them and be taken out any time when it is needed. So computers are used a lot in many ways.

Scientists are trying to make computers smaller and smaller so that they can be easily used. Computers have worked faster and faster now.

Computers can do many kinds of work. They can be used in doing business work, in scientific research work and in science of medicine. We can see them in some large factories, even in many homes. They have become popular indeed.

篇9：高二 Unit 13 全单元教案(新课标版高二英语必修五教案教学设计)

Teaching Goals

1.Talk about water and the ocean.

2.Practise communicative skills.

3.Review Modal Verbs.

4.Write an explanation paragraph.

The First Period Warming up& Listening & Speaking

Teaching Aims:

1.Learn and master the new words and the useful expressions of this part.

Words: cube, sailor, disadvantages, entertainment

Phrases: come up with, happen to

Useful expressions: The water is being used to/for…

We should/could…

If we…we can…

It would be better…

2.Learn something about water by doing experiment.

3.Do some listening.

4.Improve the students’ speaking ability by talking.

Teaching Important Points:

1.Make the students be free to talk about water.

2.Improve the students’ listening ability by listening.

Teaching Difficult Points:

1.How to finish the task of speaking.

2.How to improve the students’ listening ability.

Teaching Methods:

1.Listening-and-answering activity to help the students go through with the listening material.

2.Individual, pair or group work to make every student work in class.

Teaching Aids:

1.the multimedia

2.the blackboard

3.an empty glass, a bottle of water and a bottle of vegetable oil

Teaching Procedures:

Step Ⅰ Greetings and Lead-in

T: Hello, everyone.

Ss :Hello, teacher.

T: Attention, please. As we all know, every year during the Spring Festival and Lantern Festival in our country, people like to see the lion dance and guess the riddles. Do you like to guess the riddle?

Ss: Yes.

T: OK. Now I have a riddle. Please guess it.

(Teacher uses the multimedia to show the riddle on the screen.)

It’s very important to all the animals and plants.

It’s also important to human beings.

It’s liquid at room temperature.

Every day you keep in touch with it.

You can’t live without it. (a thing)

T: What’s it?

Ss: It’s very easy. It’s water.

T: Yeah, today we will talk about water. Now please tell me what you know about water.

S1: Water is used to drink.

S2: Water can be used to water the flowers.

S3:I think water can be used to make electricity.

Step Ⅱ Warming up

T: Thank you for your ideas. Next we will look some interesting experiments. Maybe you can learn more about water from the following experiments.( experiments shown on the screen)

T: Pour some water and some vegetable oil into the empty glass. What will happen? Try to describe it in detail.

S: The part above is vegetable oil and the part below is water.

T: Good. Do you know why?

S: I think water is heavier than oil, so vegetable oil is on the top of the water.

T: Who has different ideas?

S:I think we should say that the density of water is higher than the density of vegetable oil, so the result formed.

T: Do you agree with the reason for it?

Ss: Yes. We agree with the idea.

T: As we know, if we pour milk and water into one glass, we can’t tell where water is and where milk is. But just now we poured oil and water into one glass. It is so different. Do you know why?

Ss :Because oil can’t dissolve in water, but milk can.

T: Very good. Would you like to watch another experiment?

Ss: I’d love to.

T: OK. Cover a glass of water with a piece of thick paper. Put one hand on the paper and turn the glass upside down. Slowly take your hand away from the paper. What happens? Why?

Ss: The piece of paper doesn’t fall and the water in the glass doesn’t flow.

T: Yes. You are right. Now you are given a few minutes to have a discussion about the reason for it.

T: Who can tell us the reason why the piece of paper doesn’t fall and the water doesn’t flow?

S: When the glass of water covered with a piece of paper is turned upside down, the pressure from air to the piece of paper is bigger than the pressure from the water in the glass to the piece of paper. So the paper won’t fall and the water won’t flow.

T: Excellent! Thank you for your explanation. I am very glad to see that you are all interested in making experiments. After class, you can carry out another two experiments on Page 17.When you perform them, try to describe what happens and why. OK?

Ss: OK.

T: Now, let’s look at a picture.

(Teacher shows a picture on the screen.)

T: What can you see?

Ss: There is a river in the picture, but it’s very dirty.

T: Anything else?

S: There are some plastic bags and empty tins on the surface of the river.

T: Yes. We all know water is important to human beings and all the animals and plants. Unfortunately water is being polluted now. What do you think we can do to protect the water on our planet?

(Teacher gives students enough time to prepare. When they prepare, teacher goes among the students to help them to express their ideas correctly.)

Sample answer:

To protect the water on our planet, I think we should save every drop of water and stop throwing rubbish into water. Besides, we should try our best to help the people around us realize the importance of using and protecting our water.

Step Ⅲ Listening

T: Next, let’s do some listening. Turn to Page 18 and look at the Listening part. You can listen to the famous poems about life on the ocean. Listen carefully and write down some key words when you listen. Before you listen, let’s learn two phrases first. Look at the blackboard.

1.happen to

e.g. What happened to you last week?

If anything happens to the machine, please tell me.

2.come up with

e.g. I hope you can come up with a better plan than this.

(Teacher writes them on the blackboard and begins to explain them.)

T: Now listen, please.

(Teacher plays the tape for the first time. Then play it for the second time. During this time, teacher may pause for students to write down the information. Play some parts of the tape one more time if necessary. Finally teacher checks the answers with the whole class.)

Step Ⅳ Speaking

T: In our daily life, water can be used in different ways. Now we’ll talk about the ways in which water can be used. Look at the pictures on Page 18.The six pictures mean six different ways to use water. You can choose one of the pictures to discuss the importance of using and protecting our water, and then try to use some sentences to describe the picture you choose. If you like, you can make a dialogue with your partner about the picture. When you discuss, you may use the questions on the screen to help you.

1.How is the water being used?

2.Is this a good way to use water?

3.Why do we use water in this way?

4.Who benefits from using water in this way?

5.What are some disadvantages of using water in this way?

(Teacher shows the questions on the screen by multimedia and gives students enough time to discuss and prepare.)

Suggested answers:

(Picture 1)We can use water to make electricity, which can give us light and make us feel warm .I think it is a good way to use water.

(Picture 3) Water has a lot of usages and home use is the commonest one. Every day we must drink enough water. In addition, we need a lot of water, just for cooking and keeping clean. Water can help us to keep healthy. But if the waste water from home use is poured into river and soil, it will be harmful for some animals and plants. So we must pay more attention to it.

(Picture 4) In Picture 4,water is being used in industry. Water is very important to industry. It can be used to make paper, cool machine and so on. But the disadvantage is that a lot of water mixed with some poisonous things being poured into the river and the sea. It is dangerous for the living things in the water.

(Picture 6)

A: Do you know how the water is being used in Picture 6?

B: Water is being used for entertainment.

A: Is it a good way to use water?

B: Yes, because it can help people keep fit and enjoy nature. But if people throw rubbish into the water, it will be bad for us.

A: Yes. It is the disadvantage of using water in this way. We must be careful.

Step Ⅴ Summary and Homework

T: Today, we’re mainly learned something about water by doing experiments, speaking and listening. Besides, we’ve learnt some new words and phrases, such as: happen to, come up with, density,…

After class, try to remember them and preview the next part-Reading part. That’s all for today. Goodbye, everyone.

Ss: Goodbye, teacher!

The Second Period Reading

The Properties of Water

Teaching Aims:

1.Learn and master the following words and phrases:

cube,property,range,medium,relatively,dissolve,pure,relationship,mass,float,absorb,bottom,all the way, that is, add…to, mix with, take advantage of, manage to do

2.Improve the students’ reading ability.

3.Enable the students to realize that it is important to protect the water on our planet.

Teaching Important Points:

1.Improve the students’ reading ability.

2.Master the following phrases:

all the way, that is, mix with, take advantage of, manage to do

Teaching Difficult Points:

How to make the students understand the reading passage better.

Teaching Methods:

1.Discussion before reading to make the students interested in what they will learn.

2.Fast reading to get a general idea of the text.

3.Discussion after reading to make students understand what they’ve learned better.

4.Careful reading to get the detailed information in the text.

Teaching Aids:

1.the multimedia

2.the blackboard

Teaching Procedures:

Step Ⅰ Greetings and Revision

T: Yesterday we learnt something about water. Now who can tell me what you learned yesterday?

S1:I learned that water is very important to all the living things on the earth.

T: OK, can you give me the reason why it is important?

S2:Water can be used to wash clothing, to made electricity, to water the farm and so on. Of course, every day we must drink enough water. So water is very important.

T: Anything else?

S3:I know something about water. For example, from the experiments we made yesterday, I know vegetable oil can’t be dissolved by water.

Step Ⅱ Pre-reading and Reading

T: OK. Thank you for your answers to my questions. As we all know, we can’t live without water. But do you know what makes water so important to all the living things?

Ss: No, we don’t know.

T: Maybe we can get the answer to the question after reading the article for today. Before you read, first let’s learn the new words and phrases in the passage.

(Teacher deals with the new words with the whole class.)

T: Now please read the passage quickly to get the general idea and try to use the following structures to make six questions.

(Teacher uses multimedia to show the structures on the screen.)

1.What is/are ______?

2.What does ______ look like?

3.What are different parts of ______?

4.What can ______ be compared to?

5.How does ______ work?

6.What are some examples of ______?

(Teacher gives students five minutes to finish the fast reading and making questions. Five minutes later, teacher asks some students to write their questions on the blackboard.)

1.What are the properties of water?

2.What does the earth look like?

3.What are different parts of the ocean?

4.What can the ocean be compared to?

5.How does the special air-conditioner-the ocean work?

6.What are some examples of species in the ocean?

T: Well done. Who can tell me the general idea of the text?

S4:The passage mainly tells us it is water that makes the ocean so important to all the living things in the world.

T: Good work. Next, let’s read the passage carefully to get more information about water. While you are reading, try to finish the chart in Post-reading on Page 21 and find out the answers to the questions on the blackboard.

(Teacher gives students enough time to read the text and collects their information for the chart.)

Suggested answers:

Property What is it? What is it good for?

Chemical structure Every water molecule is made up of two hydrogen atoms and one oxygen atom. It is good for the living things in the ocean to absorb the nutrients easily.

Density The density of pure water is 1 000 kg/m3,meaning that one cubic metre of water weighs one thousand kilogram. It is good for marine organisms to take advantage of the density of water.

Heat capacity Heat capacity is the amount of energy it takes to raise the temperature of a substance one degree centigrade. It is good for the earth to keep the temperature steady.

T: Very good. What about the questions on the blackboard?

S5:I think I can answer the first one. The answer is that the properties of water are chemical structure, salinity density, heat capacity and ocean motion.

S6:In my opinion, the answer to the fourth question is that the ocean can be compared to a great place to live in.

T: Do you agree with them?

Ss: Yes.

T: What about other questions?

S7:I think plankton, sharks and whales are examples of species in the ocean.

S8:The answer to the second one is that the earth looks like an ocean planet.

T: You are quite right. Any volunteers?

S9:Dear teacher. Can you tell us the meaning of the special air-conditioner-the ocean?

T: Maybe it means that there are some similarities between air-conditioner and the ocean.

S9:Thank you. I got it.

T: Then, who can answer the question?

S10:Because the ocean can keep the temperature of the earth steady, some students compare the ocean to a special air-conditioning. I think the ocean keeps the temperature of the earth steady by absorbing and releasing heat.

T: Well done. There is only one question left. Who wants to try?(Nobody answers the question.)

T: Do you think it is a question that the text can’t answer?

Ss: Yeah. We think so.

T: OK. Maybe you are right. But I want to know the reason why you think the passage can’t answer the third question.

Ss: Because there is not any information about the different parts of the ocean.

T: Then, are there any questions you would need to add to “cover” all the information in the text?

S11:I have a question. Why is the water in the ocean always moving?

S12:Since changes in salinity and temperature affect water’s density, the water in the ocean is always moving.

Step Ⅲ Further Understanding and Language Study

T: Well done. I think you are very familiar with the passage. In the passage there are some words and expressions we should master. Now let’s look at the screen. I will give you some explanations about the words and expressions.

1.incredibly adv. (extremely or unusually)

e.g. The water is incredibly hot.

2.available adj.(that can be used or obtained)

e.g. Tickets are available at the box office.

The book is available to all the students.

3.range vi.

range from A to B

e.g. Their ages range from 25 to 50.

His interests ranged from chess to canoeing.

4.But the way the water molecule…

e.g. I don’t like the way (in which/that) he looks at me.

They admired the way (in which/that) she dealt with the crisis.

5.that is (to say) (which means)

e.g. A week later, that is, May 1 is her birthday.

He is a local government administrator, that is, he is a Civil Servant.

6.take advantage of (make use of something well/make use of somebody unfairly)

e.g. They took full advantage of the hotel’s facilities.

She took advantage of my generosity.

7.be sensitive to something (affected easily by something)

e.g. She is very sensitive to other’s words.

(Teacher writes the words, phrases and sentences on the blackboard.)

Step Ⅳ Listening and Reading Aloud

T: Let’s listen to the tape. When I play it for the first time, just listen to it. When I play it for the second time, please listen and repeat. Then read the text aloud. Are you clear about that?

Ss: Yes.

(Te teacher plays the tape for the students to listen. After listening, the teacher goes among the students and corrects any mistake the students make in pronunciation, stress and intonation.)

Step Ⅴ Summary and Homework

T: Today, we have read a passage about water. As we know, it is very important to all the living things. So we should do all we can to protect water from being polluted. In addition, try your best to retell the passage in your own words. Is that clear?

Ss: Yes.

T: See you tomorrow!

Ss: See you tomorrow!

The Third Period Grammar

Teaching Aims:

1.Review Modal Verbs.

2.Do some exercises to review some important words learnt in the last period.

Teaching Important Point:

Review Modal Verbs.

Teaching Difficult Point:

How to help the students correctly use the Modal Verbs.

Teaching Methods:

1.Review method to help the students remember all the Modal Verbs they have learnt before and use them correctly.

2.Individual work or group work to make every student work in class.

Teaching Aids:

1.the multimedia

2.the blackboard

Teaching Procedures:

Step Ⅰ Greetings and Revision

Step Ⅱ Word Study

T: Now please turn to Page 21.Look at the first part of Word Study. There are some words learnt in the last period, but the letters of these words are in the wrong order. Now I will give you a few minutes to put the letters in the correct order.

(A few minutes later, teacher may ask some students to spell their answers and give the Chinese meaning of each word to all the students. Finally teacher writes the correct words on the blackboard.

T: Good work. Next look at the screen and try to complete the following sentences by filling in the blanks with the proper words. The first letter has been given and some words can be used more than once. If you need, you can have a discussion with your partner.

(Teacher uses the multimedia to show the following sentences on the screen.)

1.The water molecule is made up of two h_____ atoms and one o_____.

2.Water is a l_____ at room temperature, but it turns into a s_____ when the temperature drops below 0℃ and into a g_____ when heated above 100℃.

3.An a_____ is the smallest part of any living or nonliving thing.

4.Places by the sea often have a s_____ climate that is never too hot or too cold, because water can a_____ and release a lot of heat.

5.Soil can a______ water, so it helps keep water from flowing away.

6.Marine scientists study the r_____ between living creatures and their habitat in the ocean.

7.Salt water has a lower f______ point and is heavier than fresh water.

8. Oil has a density lower than 1000 kg/m3,so it will f______ on water.

(Teacher gives students enough time to prepare and then check their answers.)

Suggested answers: 1.hydrogen,oxygen 2.liquid,solid,gas 3.atom 4.steady,absorb

5.absorb 6.relationship 7.freezing 8.float

Step Ⅲ Grammar

T: Up to now we have learnt many modal verbs. Who can tell me what they are?

Ss: can/could, may/might, will/would, be able to, must, should, have to, need, shall, ought to, had better…

T: Very good. Then do you know how to use them?

S2:I know “should” can be used to give others some advice.

S3:I know when I want to borrow a book from my friend, I can use “may”.

…

T: Your answers are very good. There is a conclusion about modal verbs on the screen. Let’s look at it.

(Teacher uses the multimedia to show the conclusion on the screen.)

Modal Verbs:

Possibility: can/could, may/might

Ability: can/could, be able to

Requests: can/could, will/would, would like

Necessity: must, have to, have got to, need

Certainty: must, will, should

Permission: can/could, may/might

Suggestions: could may/might, shall

Advice: should, ought to, had better

T: From the chart we can see modal verbs can be classified into eight groups by their usages. Are you clear about the classification?

Ss: Yes.

T: OK. Now look at the first part in Grammar. Finish the exercises according to the class function of modal verbs. If you need, you can discuss with your partner. In addition you’d better make it clear why you choose A、B、C、or D. Are you clear about the requirements?

Ss: Yes.

(Teacher gives students enough time to finish the exercises. Then deals with them with the whole class.)

T: Are you ready?

Ss: Yes.

T: OK. Who’d like to tell me the answer to the first one?

S4:I think “A” is right.

T: Can you tell us the reason why you choose “A”?

S4:Because the speaker wants to express his/her request. Among A、B、C and D, only A can be used to express request.

T: Very good. What about the second one?

S5:“May” is right, I think, because the sentence is used to ask for permission.

T: Congratulations! Who can answer the third one?

S6:The phrase “wants to” express a state of being necessity. So I think “C” is right.

T: Well done. It’s turn to do the fourth one. Who can try?

S7:I’m not sure, but I want to have a try. Is “C” right?

T: Why did you choose “C”?

S8:I think the first sentence expresses some necessity and the second one expresses guess.

S9:I don’t think so. Because “must” can’t be used in negative sentences to express guess.

S8:Oh,I’m sorry. I forgot it. I see, the correct answer is “D”.

T: Excellent!

…

(Teacher encourages students to show their opinions about each one, and then teacher gives the correct answers and some necessary explanations.)

Suggested answers:

1.A 2.A 3.C 4.D 5.A 6.A 7.A 8.B 9.A

T: You have finished the first part successfully. Now let’s go on with the second part. Do you have confidence to finish it?

Ss: Yes. Of course we have.

T: OK. This is a letter from Mary to John.Maybe John met some problems, so Mary wants to write a letter to help him .But Mary doesn’t know how to use the modal verbs correctly. She wants you to help her finish the letter. Before you finish the letter, read it to get the general idea of it first and then answer the questions on the screen.

(Teacher uses multimedia to show the questions on the screen.)

1.Can you tell from the letter what John’s problem is?

2.Do you agree on the advice that Mary gives to him? Why? What would be your advice?

(Teacher gives students a few minutes to read the letter, and then checks their answers to the questions.)

T: Who’d like to answer the first question?

S10:I want to have a try. In my opinion, John’s problem is that his manager suspected him of stealing something at the meat factory.

T: Well done. Do you agree with him?

Ss: Yes.

T: What about the second one?

S11:I’d like to answer the question. I don’t agree to the advice that Mary gives to him. Because if he finds another job, maybe it means that he really stole something at the meat factory. I think he should tell the manager that he didn’t do it and advise the manager to call in the police to make it clear.

S12:In my opinion, he’d better try to find out who is the real thief to prove that he didn’t do anything wrong.

…

T:I think your suggestions are all very helpful to John and I hope he can find a good way to deal with the problem. Now you are clear about John’s problem. It’s your turn to help Mary finish the letter. Maybe there are more than one answer for some blanks. If you have some difficulties, you can discuss with your partner. Five minutes later, I will check your answers.

Suggested answers:

can/ will/ should, may not/ might not, must, could/ should, might/ would, will, might/ may/ could/ would, might, would/ could/ might, should, will

Step Ⅳ Summary and Homework

T: Today, we’ve reviewed some new words learnt in this unit. In particular, we have reviewed the usages of modal verbs. After class, do more exercises to master them better. Time is up. That’s all for today. See you tomorrow.

Ss: See you tomorrow.

The Fourth Period Integrating skills

Teaching Aims:

1.Review the useful expressions learnt in this unit by practising.

2.Improve the students’ reading ability by reading the material.

3.Improve the students’ writing ability.

4.Enable the students to realize that it is important to protect the estuary.

Teaching Important Points:

1.Improve the students’ reading ability by reading the material.

2.Improve the students’ writing ability.

Teaching Difficult Point:

How to improve the students’ integrating skills-reading and writing.

Teaching Methods:

1.Fast reading to go through the reading material.

2.Inductive method to help students write a paragraph successfully.

Teaching Aids:

1.the multimedia

2.the blackboard

Teaching Procedures:

Step Ⅰ Greetings

Greet the whole class as usual.

Step Ⅱ Revision

T: Yesterday we did some practice about modal verbs. Now let’s do some more exercises to see if you have mastered them. Please look at the screen.

(Teacher uses multimedia to show the exercises on the screen.)

Fill in the blanks using must/might/may/can/could and their negative forms.

1.-I saw Mary in the street yesterday.

-You ______ have seen her. She is still in Australia.

2.-Could I use your bike? -Yes, of course you ______.

3.The ground is wet. It ______ have rained last night.

4.A machine ______ think for itself. It ______ be told what to do.

5.Tom,don’t play with the valuable bottle. You ______ break it.

Suggested answers:

1.can’t 2.can 3.must 4.can’t,must 5.may/might

Step Ⅲ Fast Reading

T: Good work. But if we want to use the modal verbs correctly, we must practise them as often as possible. Today we will read another passage. The ocean is very important to all the living things, which is known to us, and I think we have also known about the reason why the ocean becomes so important-because of the properties of water, the ocean is very important. The passage we will read is also about water. It deals with “the body of water”.Are you interested in the topic?

S1:Yes.But what is the meaning of “the body of water”?I think water has no body.

T: Good question. I think you can get the answer to the question by yourself. Now let’s read the passage. While you are reading, try to make clear what is the main idea of each paragraph. Besides, try fast reading, it is helpful to improve your reading ability.

(Teacher gives students a few minutes to read the passage.)

T: Have you finished your reading?

Ss: Yes.

T: Wang Lin, are you clear about “the body of water”?

S2:Yes.I think “the body of water” means the main part of water.

T: You are great! Now who’d like to tell me the main idea of the first paragraph?

S3:An estuary is the body of water where a river meets the ocean.

T: Right, thank you for your answer. What about the second one?

S4:Let me try. The general idea is that estuaries are great places for nature’s young.

T: Wang Ping, tell me the main idea of the third paragraph, please!

S5:I’m not sure. I think the third paragraph tells us estuaries are important to animals and plants, so we should try our best to protect them from environmental pollution. Am I right?

T: Yes. Congratulations! There is only the last paragraph left. Who can try?

S6:I think the main idea of the last paragraph is that estuaries are also important to human beings because they not only provide recreation and education for us but also contribute to the economy.

Step Ⅳ Discussion and Explanation

T: The general idea of the passage is very clear to us now. Now let’s re-read the passage carefully. While you are reading, try to find out the answers to the questions on Page 23.If you need, you can have a discussion about them. Then I’ll check your answers.

(Teacher gives students enough time to read the passage. At the same time, teacher goes among them and helps them express their own opinions in English correctly.)

Suggested answers:

1.Tides provide energy for the ecosystem, and estuaries are protected from waves and storms by islands. In addition nutrients arrive in estuaries from both the land and the ocean. So estuaries are great places for nature’s young ones.

2.Density means the quality of being dense. In other words, there are more living creatures than any other habitat on earth.

3.Estuaries can make our water clean by absorbing nutrients and pollutants from water coming from inland sources.

4.The function that estuaries can absorb pollutants and nutrients makes estuaries very sensitive to environmental pollution.

5.Estuaries can provide recreation and education for human beings. Besides estuaries also contribute to the economy. So they are very important to human beings.

T: Well done. Now you are very familiar with the passage.

To understand the passage better, I will explain some important phrases. Please, look at the blackboard.

(Teacher writes the following phrases on the blackboard.)

1.provide…for

e.g. The company will provide food and drink for them.

2.have an opportunity to do something

e.g. I had no opportunity to discuss the problem with her yesterday.

3.a variety of

e.g. He left for a variety of reasons.

There are a variety of patterns for you to choose from.

4.contribute to

e.g. His work has contributed to our understanding of this difficult subject.

Step Ⅴ Writing

T: Up to now, we have learnt a lot about water and known the properties of water and importance of estuaries. Now you are given an opportunity to check if you know a lot about water. Look at the questions on the screen.

(Teacher uses multimedia to show the questions on the screen.)

1.Why does an ice cube float?

2.What will happen to a piece of metal if you put it in water?

3.Why do so many species live in estuaries?

4.Why have so many cities been built by estuaries?

T: Now imagine that your science teacher asks you to choose one of the questions and write a paragraph to explain it. Use what you learn from this unit and what you know about nature and science to write the paragraph. You must be careful to explain it to make your explanations easy to understand. You’d better look at the tips on Page 24 before you write. It’s of great help to your writing.

Possible samples:

(Question 3)

Salt water from the ocean and fresh water from the river mix together in an estuary. The mixing of fresh and salt water creates a unique environment filled with life of all kinds. Here, animals can enjoy all the benefits of the oceans without having to face many of its dangers and nutrients arrive in estuaries from both the land and the ocean. So there are so many species living in estuaries.

(Question 4)

Estuaries are great places for nature’s young. If many cities are built by estuaries, we can enjoy fishing, swimming and having fun on the beach and scientists and students have endless opportunities to study a variety of life in the habitat. What’s more, estuaries also contribute to the economy through tourism and fishing. So many cities have been built by estuaries.

Step Ⅵ Test

T: In this unit, we’ve learnt some important phrases. Now I’ll give you a test to check whether you’ve mastered them or not. Look at the screen, please.

(Teacher uses multimedia to show the test on the screen and gives students a few minutes to finish them. Then checks their answers.)

1.The children’s age ______(在5岁至15岁之间).

2.______(她处理这个问题的方法) is very good.

3.A week later,______（也就是),Oct 1 is National Day.

4.He ______(充分利用了) multimedia in the class.

5.The little girl ______(对温度很敏感).

6.His actions ______(使他受到尊敬).

7.He ______(设法完成了工作) with very little help.

Suggested answers:

1.range from 5 to 15 2.The way she deals with the problem

3.that is 4.took advantage of

5.is very sensitive to temperature 6.made him respected

7.managed to get the work done

Step Ⅶ Summary and Homework

T: Today, we’ve done some reading and writing. We’ve also reviewed some useful expressions in this unit. After class, go over all the important points we have learnt in this unit. That’s all for today. Class is over.

The Fifth Period Modal Verbs

Teaching Aims:

1.Review the important usages of modal verbs.

2.Sum up the different situations of modal verbs.

Teaching Important Point:

How to use modal verbs correctly.

Teaching Difficult Point:

How to choose modal verbs correctly.

Teaching Methods:

1.Review method to master the important usages of modal verbs.

2.Inductive method and comparative method to master the important and difficult points.

Teaching Aids:

1.the multimedia

2.the blackboard

Teaching Procedures:

Step Ⅰ Greetings

Greet the whole class as usual.

Step Ⅱ Revision

T: In this unit, we have done some practice about modal verbs. As we know, modal verbs have several points in common which make them quite different from other verbs. Now, please discuss the points in common among modal verbs in groups of four. After a while I will check your answers. (Teacher gives students enough time to discuss, and then collects their answers and sums them up.) Modal Verbs:

1.Modal verbs are used when we say that we expect things to happen or that things are possible, or necessary, or impossible, or improbable, or when we describe things that didn’t happen, or that we are not sure whether they happened.

2.Modal verbs have no -s on the third person singular. Questions and negatives are made without “do”.

3.Modal verbs have no infinitives.

4.Modal verbs have no past forms. “Could” and “would” are used with past meanings in some cases.

5.Modal verbs can be used with perfect infinitive to talk about things which didn’t happen, or which we’re not sure about.

Step Ⅲ Revision of the Important Usages of Modal Verbs

T: Good work. As we all know, modal verbs can be classified into eight groups according to their usages. Today we will review some important usages of modal verbs. Firstly, let’s review the modal verbs that can be used to express “possibility”.Please tell me which modal verbs can be used to express “possibility”.

Ss: Can/could/may/might all express “possibility”.

T: When they express “possibility”,they are not quite the same.“Can” is used to talk about theoretical possibility. If we want to talk about the actual chances of something happening, or being true, we use “could/may/might”.Besides,“can” is sometimes used to talk about present “possibility”,but only in questions and negative sentences. Is that clear?

Ss: Yes.

T: Now, let’s do some exercises to master them better. Look at the screen and try to finish the sentences as soon as possible.

(Teacher uses multimedia to show the sentences on the screen.)

Fill in the blanks using can/could/may/might.

1.Would you like to answer the phone? It ______ be your sister.

2.The part of the country ______ be very warm in September.

3.______ it be Lily?

4.It ______(not) be true.

5.You ______ be right.

Suggested answers:

1.could/may/might 2.can 3.Can 4.can’t 5.may/might/could

T: Besides “possibility”,can/could/may/might are also used to express “permission”.Yes?

Ss: Yes. But we are not sure about how to use them.

T: It doesn’t matter. I will give you some explanation.“Can” is the commonest one of the four, and “could” is rather more hesitant than “can”.“May” and “might” are used in a more formal style. They often suggest respect. “Might” is more hesitant and is not very common. Besides, when we give permission, we usually use “can” and “may”,but not “could” and “might”.When we report permission,“may” is not usually used. Are you clear about it?

Ss: Yes.

T: Then try to finish the following exercises, please.

(Teacher shows the exercises on the screen.)

1.-______I use your phone?

-Yes, of course. You ______.

2.______ you come into the meeting room without showing a passport?

3.Mary said that I ______ borrow her car.

Suggested answers:

1.Can/Could/May/Might;can/may

2.Can

3.might/could（“Might” and “could” can be used after a past verb.）

T: Next, which modal verbs do you think are necessary to review?

Ss: The modal verbs expressing “necessity”.They are very important.

T: Yes, I agree with you. We can use “must/have to/have got to/need” to express “necessity”.But about how to use them, I want you to review them by understanding the following sentences by yourselves. Look at the sentences on the screen.

(Teacher shows the sentences on the screen, and then asks some questions.)

1.I really must study hard.

2.You must be here by 3 o’clock.

3.You have (got) to go and see the manager.

4.You needn’t work on Sundays.

T: From the sentences, who can tell me the difference between “must” and “have to”?

S1:I want to have a try. When “must” is used, the necessity comes from the speaker. If the necessity comes from “outside”,“have (got) to” is more common.

T: Congratulations! Do you know how to use “need”?

S2:I think in negative sentences,“don’t need to”,“needn’t” or “don’t have to” is used to say that there is “no necessity”.

T: Please give me an example. OK?

S2:I know the reason why you were late. You needn’t try to explain.

T: Thank you. In addition, I want to tell you “have got to” is used instead of “have to” in informal English. Is that clear?

Ss: Yeah.

T: Now look at the blackboard.(Write the following on the blackboard.)

1.It must have rained last night, for the ground is wet.

2.You can’t have seen him yesterday, for he is still in Australia.

3.You could have told me he was coming.

4.She is very late. She may have missed the bus.

T: These sentences have something in common. Who can tell me what it is?

Ss: The modal verbs in these sentences are used together with perfect infinitives.

T: Very good. Then let’s review the modal verbs used together with perfect infinitives.

S3:When should we use modal verbs together with perfect infinitives?

T: When we talk about the past, we can use the structure, but it has a special meaning. It is used for speculating(thinking about what possibly happened) or guessing (thinking about how things could have been different).Have you got it?

Ss: Yes. Thank you.

T: Now let’s do some exercises to consolidate the usage of the structure.

1.I told Sally how to get there, but perhaps I ______for her.

A. had to write it out

B. must be have written it out

C. should have written it out

D. ought to write it out

2.You didn’t let me drive. If we ______ in turn, you ______ so tired.

A. drove; didn’t get

B. drove; wouldn’t get

C. were driving; wouldn’t get

D. had driven; wouldn’t have got

3.-I want to know why she is late.

-She ______ the early bus.

A. could miss

B. can have missed

C. may have missed

D. might miss

4.-I stayed at a hotel in New York.

-Oh, did you? You ______ with Barbara.

A. could have stayed

B. could stay

C. would stay

D. must have stayed

5.The light is still on. He ______ to turn it off when he ______ the room.

A. may forget; leave

B. must have forgotten; left

C. may forget; have left

D. could have forget; left

(Teacher shows the exercises on the screen and gives students enough time to finish them,and then checks their answers and gives them some necessary explanation.)

Suggested answers:

1.C 2.D 3.C 4.A 5.B

T: Now, it’s turn to review modal verbs expressing “advice”.Who’d like to tell me which modal verbs we can use to express “advice”?

S4:I think we usually use “should/ought to/had better” to give “advice”.

T: Yes. In most cases, both “should” and “ought to” can be used with more or less the same meaning. However, there is a very slight difference. When we use “should”,we give our own subjective opinion.“Ought to” had a rather more objective force, and is used when we are talking about laws, duties and regulations. Are you clear about that?

Ss: Yes.

T: Who wants to give us an example using “should” and “ought to” expressing “advice”?

S5:People ought to vote even though they don’t agree with any of the candidates.

T: Well done. What about “should”?

S6:Let me try. You should see “Hero”-it’s a great film.

T: Thank you for your good performance. Do you know how to use “had better”?

Ss: Yes. When we use “had better”,we don’t usually mean that the action recommended would be better than another one. We simply mean that he/she ought to do it.

T: Please make up a sentence using “had better”.

S7:You’d better hurry up, if you want to get to the factory on time.

T: Good example!

Step Ⅳ Summary and Homework

T: Up to now, we have reviewed modal verbs which express possibility, necessity, permission, advice and modal verbs used together with perfect infinitives. They are all very important. After class, try to do more exercises to master them better. That’s all for today. See you tomorrow.

Ss: See you tomorrow.

篇10：Unit 11 全单元教案(新课标版高二英语必修五教案教学设计)

I． 单元教学目标

技能目标Goals

▲ Talk about science and scientific achievement

▲ Practise expressing intentions and wishes

▲ Learn about Word Formation (1)

▲ Write a persuasion essay

II． 目标语言

功

能

句

式 1．Talk about science and scientists

2. Practise expressing intentions and wishes

If I got the money, I would……

My plan is to…….

I hope that…….

I want/ wish/hope/intend/plan to……

I’d like to……

I’m thinking of……

词 汇 1. 四会词汇

Engineering, solar, significant, mankind, constitution, likely, zone, private, grasp, master, perfect , arrange, rely, failure, locate, valley, brand, luggage, achieve, organ, boom, breakthrough, agency, announce, evolution, supercomputer

2. 认读词汇

Neil Armstrong, Alexander G Bell, eureka, economic, hi-tech, technological, overseas, IT, Lenovo, Founder, silicon, Nokia, Motorola, rejuvenate, impressive, genome, element, byte, humanoid

3. 词组

set foot (in), rely on, put forward,

4．重点词汇

significant, likely, private, grasp, master, perfect , arrange, rely, failure, locate, achieve,

breakthrough, announce

结构 Word formation

重

点

句

子 1．Whatever great achievements the future may have in store for China, it is likely that many of them will be born in northwestern Beijing.

2. Not all the new companies can succeed, but the spirit and creativity they represent are more important than money.

The First Period Warming up &Listening& Speaking

Teaching Aims:

1.Learn and master the following.

(1)New words: engineering, solar, significant, mankind, constitution

(2)Everyday English:

If I got the money, I would…

My plan is to…

I hope that…

I want/wish/hope/intend/plan to…

I’d like to…

I’m thinking of…

2.Train the students’ listening and speaking abilities.

3.Talk about science and scientific achievement, urging the students to further understand the significance of science and scientific achievement and encouraging them to work hard at their lessons.

Teaching Important Points:

1.Finish the task of listening to train the students’ listening ability.

2.Practise expressing intentions and wishes to train the students’ speaking ability.

Teaching Difficult Points:

1.How to help the students talk in English about science and scientific achievement freely.

2.How to help the students finish the tasks of listening and speaking smoothly.

Teaching Methods:

1.Listening and speaking to train the students’ ability to use English.

2.Individual,pair or group work to make every student take an active part in class.

Teaching Aids: a tape recorder, a projector and a computer

Teaching Procedures:

Step I Warming up

Show the pictures of some great scientific achievements that have changed the world on the PowerPoint. Divide students into groups and ask them to discuss which one is the most important and what these achievements have in common. (The exercises in warming up on Page 1).Students may have different opinions. The most important thing is to encourage them to think and express their opinions.

T: Please look at these great achievements and work in groups and discuss the following questions. You may have different answers. But you will have to tell us your reasons. (Show the following questions on the PowerPoint.)

1. Among the great scientific achievements that have changed the world, which one do you think is the most important? Why?

2. What are some other scientific achievements that you think are important?

3. Do these achievements have anything in common? If so, what?

Five minutes later ask some students to speak out their opinion.

T: Ok. Please stop here. I’d like to listen to your opinions.

S1: I think electricity is the most important. The modern world cannot work without electricity. Electricity has changed our way of life. This summer in some areas there wasn’t enough electric power, so some factories had to close and people had lot of problems in life.

S2: In my opinion the most important is Radio and television. Radio and television have changed the way we look at the world.

S3: That’s true. But I still think the most important is solar energy. Because by using solar energy, we can save other energy resources. And what’s more we can protect our environment…

T: Good! Do these achievements have anything in common?

Ss: These great achievements have changed the world.

S8: And all these great achievements were made by westerners/ foreigners.

T: That’s true. My dear students please think thousands of years ago our ancestors made 4 great inventions that changed the world. We are proud of them. But among the recent 75 greatest achievements, none was achieved by us Chinese .So I hope you study hard and make great scientific achievements. I will be very proud of you. Every Chinese will be proud of you.

Step II Listening

T: The listening material contains two parts. You are going to hear some words said by some famous people at the time when they achieved success. Can you follow me?

Ss: Yes.

T: Well, now look at the chart in Exercise 1 at the top of Page 2 quickly. Then I’ll play the first part of the tape for you to complete it. After that, I’ll check your answers.

(After checking the answers to Exercise 1,teacher goes on to deal with Exercise 2)

T: Well done. Now, listen to Part 2 and complete the sentences in Exercise 2.If necessary, I’ll play it twice for you to finish or check your answers. OK?

Ss: OK.

T: I’ll play it. Listen carefully!

(At last, teacher deals with Exercise 3.)

T:OK. So much for the tape. Now imagine you were the first person on Mars, or the first cloned human being or the first person to travel in time, what would you say? Any volunteer?

S1:If I were the first person on Mars, I would say “I’m here from the earth.”…

S2:…

T: Wonderful. If you want to do research about something, besides hard work, what else do you need?

Ss: Modern equipment and money, especially money. You get enough money, and then you get the equipment you need. Funds are essential for doing research.

T: You are right. Now, please look at the Speaking part.

Step III Speaking

T: Here are four scientists who want to get money to complete their project. Each scientist will have to introduce his or her project and explain why it is the most important. Now, I’ll put you in groups of five to have a discussion. Four group members represent scientists; one member will listen to all the scientists and ask questions. At the end of the discussion, he or she must decide who will get the money and why. Is everything clear?

Ss: Yes.

T: And following the situation, there are some useful expressions. You can use them to express your intentions and wishes. Let’s go through them together before your discussion.

(Teacher and the students go through the expressions. After that, teacher puts the students in groups of five and gets them to prepare for a few minutes. At the end, teacher asks one or two groups to report their work to the rest of the class.)

Step IV Summary and Homework

T: In this class, we’ve mainly talked about scientific achievement. Centering on this topic, we did some listening and speaking. This way, we’ve learnt more about science and scientific achievement. Moreover, we’ve learnt some useful expressions to express intentions and wishes, such as “If I got the money I would…;My plan is to…;”(Teacher writes them on the blackboard.)After class, try to practise using them and preview the reading part. So much for today. Goodbye, everyone.

Ss:Goodbye, Mr/Ms…

The Second Period Reading

Teaching Aims:

1. Target Language:

a. 重点词汇和短语

likely zone, private, grasp, master, perfect, arrange, rely, failure, locate, valley, set foot in, rely on

b. 重点句型

①Whatever great achievements the future may have in store for China, it is likely that many of them will be born in northwestern Beijing.

②Not all the new companies can succeed, but the spirit and creativity they represent are more important than money.

2.Ability goals: Learn about the development of Zhongguancun and great achievements China has made in recent years. Encourage students to become interested in hi-tech.

3. Learning ability goals: Students are divided into different groups. Each group will be assigned different tasks. They are asked to collect Zhongguancun’s information from different resources outside of class. Each group member should be involved. Through these activities students should learn to be involved, co-operate and solve problems.

Teaching important points

The development of Zhongguancun and great achievements China has made in recent years.

Teaching difficult points

How to analyze the text and grasp the main idea of the text.

Teaching methods Listening, reading, discussing

Teaching aids a tape recorder, a projector and a computer

Teaching procedures:

Step I Revision

Check the homework..

Go over the three great names Neil Armstrong, Alexander G Bell, Ray Tomlinson and how they changed the world.

Ask some students to read words and expressions in Unit 11.

Step II Pre-reading

Deal with the questions in the pre-reading part.

T: Good! In this class we are going to learn about the development of Zhongguancun First I’d like to make a survey. If you wanted to do research or start a hi-tech company, what kind of support and environment would you need?

S1: I think I will need support from academies of science.

S2：I think I will need support from the government, i.e. special policy to support my company.

S3: In my opinion, competition will help companies develop very fast. So I will set up my company in a science and technology center.

S4:……

T: Good! Why are scientific achievements important? How do they improve our life? How do they improve society?

S8: Scientific achievements can improve our life and change the world. For example before areoplanes and cars were invented, it took years to travel around the world. Now it is very convenient for people to travel.

S9: Scientific achievements make our life colorful. Scientific achievements make life more comfortable.

S10: Scientific achievements change our way of life. We are living a life quite different from our ancestors’.

S11: Scientific achievements also change our way of thinking…

T: So scientific achievements are very important. Then you will good answers to this question:

Why do scientists spend so much time trying to achieve something?

S15: Because they like to do something valuable.

S16: Then they turn their wishes into reality.

S17: They are doing something to strengthen the social development.

T: They are very great. I hope you study hard and in future you will make some scientific achievements to benefit the world.

Step III Leading in

Help students to learn something about the symbol of Zhongguancun..

T: Now look at the picture. ( Show the picture of the statue in Zhongguancun on the PowerPoint.) Do you know where it is? It is a statue of a DNA molecule. It is the symbol of the Zhongguancun Scientific and Technological Garden. In this class we are going to learn something about Zhongguancun.

Step IV Reading

Deal with the reading part.

Scanning

Ask the students to scan the text and find the information aboutZhongguancun. Then fill the information in the form. It is not necessary to write in whole sentences. Key words will do. Students will finish the task independently and then they will compare their notes with their group members.

T: First I’d like you to do the scanning and then finish the form with the information you get from the text. You don’t need to write in sentences. Key words are OK. After you finish, please compare your notes with the other group members.

Show the form on the PowerPoint.

Zhongguancun is located in Northwestern Beijing

What is it? China’s Silicon Valley

In the early 1980s Chen Chunxian opened a private research and development institute

Set up as a special economic zone

Zhongguancun is home to A growing number of overseas Chinese;

A number of science parks;

Many IT companies

The number of IT companies in Zhongguancun More that 8,000 hi-tech companies

Its effect On business& science

Several minutes later, students compare their information with each other in groups. Then show the following form on the PowerPoint.

Zhongguancun is located in Beijing’s Haidian District Northwestern Beijing

What is it? New center for Chinese science and technology China’s Silicon Valley

The science center got started In the early 1980s Chen Chunxian opened a private research and development institute

Set up as a special economic zone In the late 1990s Leader of China’s hi-tech industry

Zhongguancun is home to Some famous research institutes and universities A growing number of overseas Chinese；A number of science parks;

Many IT companies

The number of IT companies in Zhongguancun More than 4,000 IT companies More that 8,000 hi-tech companies

Its effect positive On business & science

T: From this form we can have a clear image of Zhongguancun. Let’s come to the post reading questions.

Skimming

Ask students to skim the text and then finish the post-reading questions.

T: Look at the post reading questions first. Then skim the text to find the answers.

Then check the answers with the whole class.

Suggested answers: 1. A.B.C.D 2. D 3.C.D 4.B 5. C.D

Sum up the main idea of each part.

Ask the students to read through the text and grasp the main idea of the text. Before giving students the answers, ask them to discuss first.

In this procedure, students should sum up the main ideas by themselves first, then discuss with group members.

(Cooperative learning)

T: Now let’s sum up the main idea of each part. While reading, please think carefully and decide how many parts the text should be divided into.

After reading the text, Ss will think carefully and then they will discuss with their group members. Then some spokesmen will stand up and speak out their opinions.

T: OK. I’m glad you have thought actively and had a heated discussion. Let’s look at the suggested answers.

(Show the suggested answers on the PowerPoint.)

The main idea of each part

Part1 (Paragraph1-2)

General introduction of Zhongguancun.

Part2 (Paragraph 3-7)

Why Zhongguancun attracts more and more overseas Chinese.

Part3 (Paragraph 8-9)

The positive effect Zhongguancun has had on both business and science & the spirit of Zhongguancun.

T:I hope you will remember the spirit of Zhongguancun.I hope it will encourage you to study hard and be the guide of your life.

Step IV Explanation

During this procedure Teacher will play the tape for students. Students will underline the difficult sentences. After listening to the tape, Teacher will explain the text and deal with language problems.

T: We have learned the main ideas of the text. This time we will deal with some difficult language focuses. Now I will play the tape for you .Please make a mark where you have difficulties.

After listening to the tape, explain the difficult sentences to students. Before explaining the difficult points, students are asked to refer to the notes to the text.

T: Do you have any difficulties with the text？

S1In the first sentence Whatever great achievements the future may have in store for China, it is likely that many of them will be born in northwestern Beijing. can I replace “likely” with “possible”?

T: Yes, you can. It is the same. We can say “It is possible that something will happen” But when we say “Somebody is likely to do sth “or “Something is likely to happen.”.

E.g. The train is likely to be late.

She is not likely to come next month.

S2: In the last paragraph the second sentence” Not all the new companies can succeed”, does “not all “mean “none”?

T: No, “not all” means” some”.Do you have any other questions?

Ss: No.

T: Today’s home work Surf on the internet and find more about Chen Chunxian and Zhongguancun .That’s all for today.

Step VI Homework

Surf on the internet and find more about Chen Chunxian and Zhongguancun.

The Third Period Grammar

Teaching Aims:

1. Learn the Grammar--- Word formation (I)

2. Study the ways of forming a word and enlarge students’ vocabulary.

3. Enable students to use context clues and what they know about word parts to guess the meaning of new words.

Teaching important points:

The ways of forming a word.

Teaching difficult points:

How to guess the meaning of a new word.

Teaching methods: Explaining and practising

Teaching aids: 1. a projector 2. a computer

Teaching procedures:

Step I Lead in

T: Good morning afternoon, class!

Ss: Good morning afternoon,Mr/Ms…

T: This week we are learning Unit 11 Scientific achievements .Now pay attention to the two words. Will you please tell me how the two words are formed?

S1“Scientific”is the adjective form of” Science”.

S2:“Achievement “ is the noun form of “achieve”.

T: Observe them carefully; can you explain how they are formed?

S3:” Science” is a noun, if we add –fic to it, then we get its adjective.

S4: “achieve” is a verb. If we add –ment to it, we get its noun.

T: Excellent ! That is how the two words are formed. The basic part of any word is the root; to it, you can add a prefix at the beginning and/or a suffix at the end to change the meaning. For example, in the word “unflattering,” the root is simply “flatter,” while the prefix “un-” makes the word negative, and the suffix “-ing” changes it from a verb into an adjective (specifically, a participle).This is the grammar we are going to learn in this class.(Show Word Formation on the powerpoint.)

Step II Grammar

Ask students to observe the given words carefully and find out how words are formed.

T: How do learners improve their vocabulary? There are no super shortcuts to vocabulary, but there are various forms of support. Here is one example. Increasing your vocabulary is so important that you just can't forget about it. Don't bury your head in the sand. OK.. Please look at the following words and tell how they are formed. (Show the following words on the PowerPoint.)

affix

infix

prefix

suffix

Teacher explains the following.

T: What do these words (nouns) have in common?

Ss: All of them contain the root “fix”.

T: Well, they do have a number of things in common. Let's settle for the most obvious, the 'fix' at the end. So if we split them, this is what we get

af + fix

in + fix

pre + fix

suf + fix (These will be shown on the PowerPoint)

T: What does 'fix' mean?

Ss: Fix means attach to, fasten, stick, glue.

T: What about 'af' , 'in' , 'pre' , 'suf' ? in' and 'pre' are understandable, aren't they ?

'in' a room, 'in' a sentence, 'in' a word.

'pre' means before like in pre-war, pre-school, premature.

So what do infix and prefix actually mean? infix - to attach something inside (a word).prefix - to attach something at the beginning of (a word)

What about 'af' and 'suf'?

That's a bit more difficult to explain. 'af' is actually from the beginning the Latin word 'ad', and the meaning is the same as the English word add. Add 4 and 5 and you get 9.

'suf' is the Latin word 'sub', like in submarine, subway, suburb. The meaning is under, after (outside).

Why have the d in 'ad' and the b in 'sub' changed into f?

The reason is really quite simple. 'adfix' and 'subfix' are difficult to pronounce. There is economy in everything! You simply leave out the d and the b, but in order to mark their existence the words are spelt with an extra f .

So what do affix and suffix actually mean?

Ss: affix - to attach something to (a word)

suffix -to attach something at the end of (a word)

T: We have now fixed the fixes, haven't we? affix - something you add (stick) to a word

There are three kinds of affixes:

added inside the word - infix

added at the beginning of the word - prefix

added at the end of the word – suffix

Ss: What's this good for then?

T: Well, there are thousands of words with prefixes and suffixes. The infixes are fewer and less useful to you.

The English vocabulary basically consists of words of Latin and Germanic origin. There are prefixes in both groups.

If you know the basic meaning of a prefix or a suffix you can often 'guess' the meaning of an English word. There are a limited number of Latin prefixes and suffixes. If you learn the meaning of them, and learn to recognize them in English words, you will increase your vocabulary much faster.

Here are some of the most common Latin prefixes (for the meanings of the Latin roots, look up the words in a good dictionary): (Show the following on the PowerPoint.)

ab

(away) abstain, absent, absolve

ad

(to) adverb, advertisement, advance, adjoin

in /il-/im-/ir-

(not) incapable, indecisive, intolerable , illegal, impossible, irrugular

inter

(between, among) international, interaction interdependent, interprovincial

pre

(before) prerecorded, preface prefer

post

(after) postpone, postscript, postwar

sub

(under, not quite) subsoil, subscription, suspect ,subway, subnormal

trans

(across, to a changed state) transfer, transit, translate, transport ,transform

Step III Practice

T: Are you ready for some exercises? Open your books and look at Page6. Let’s do the exercises. Let’s do Exercise 1 first .How are these words formed? (Or show the following words on the PowerPoint).

international= inter-+national telephone= tele-+phone

mankind=man+kind broadband= broad+band

extremely=extreme+-ly manned= man+ -ed

hi-tech= high+technology email= electronic mail

IT= information technology CSA= Chinese Space Agency

S1:I think international and telephone are formed in the same way. We add prefix inter- to national and tele- to phone.

T: Good! What about the others?

S2: Mankind and broadband are formed in the same way. Each is made up of two words.

S3:Extremely and manned are formed by adding a suffix.

S4:Hi-tech is the shortened form of high technology and e-mail is the shortened form of electronic mail.

S5: IT stands for information technology. We use the first letters of the two words to form a new one .We use the first letters of Chinese Space Agency to form the word CSA.

T；Well done .So we know that words are formed in these ways. When you come across a new word, you can easily guess the meaning. Ok ,let’s come to Exercise2.

Deal with the rest of exercises in the same way.

Step IV Exercises( workbook)

T: After doing theses exercises I’m sure you have a better understanding on word formation. I hope this will help you to improve your vocabulary. When you come across a new word, try to guess its meaning in this way. Good luck to you! Today’s homework Finish all of the Vocabulary and Grammar exercises on the workbook That’s all for today.

Step VI Homework: Finish all of the Vocabulary and Grammar exercises on the workbook. Learn vocabulary on scientific achievements.

The Fourth Period Integrating Skills

Teaching Aims:

1. Target language

a. 重点词汇和短语 boom, rejuvenating, impressive, genetic, genome, byte, broadband, humanoid, put forward

b. 重点句型In 1995, the Chinese government put forward a plan for “rejuvenating the nation by relying on science and education”.

2. Help students to learn about scientific achievements in different fields made by Chinese.

3. After learning about scientific achievements, students should realize scientific achievements rely on science and education and knowledge will help them to achieve their goals.

Teaching important points

Help students to learn about scientific achievements in different fields made by Chinese.

Help students to realize scientific achievements rely on science and education and knowledge will

help them to achieve their goals.

Writing: Write a persuasion essay.

Teaching difficult points

How to write a persuasion essay.

Teaching methods: Task-based teaching method

Teaching aids: 1. A recorder 2. A projector 3. A computer

Teaching procedures:

Step I Leading in

T: Though the scientists had many failures, his spirit inspires thousands of people to work hard to build a new future. Just as a motto says: “Encouraging pioneering work and accepting failure”, great scientific achievements are the results of years of failures, years of trying to create something that has never existed before. Now let’s look at the great achievements we Chinese have made in different fields.

Step II Integrating skills

Students are requested to look through the text in the given time and then finish the exercise on Page 8. Students are given several minutes to discuss their answers with their group members. Several minutes later, check the answers with the whole class.

T: Look through the text on page 7 quickly and then finish the exercise on page 8.Eight minutes later we will check the answers together.

Field Achievements Importance

Exploring space Developed Long March rocket series Safe; used to send satellites into space; prepare for the nation’s first manned flight

Genetic research A new kind of rice which allow farmers to increase production；

Completed part of the international human genome project in A leader in the field of genetic research;

Proving that Chinese scientists are among the world’s best

Computer engineering A new high-speed broadband network was recently started;

Developed the supercomputer Shenwei; built the nation’s first humanoid robot The internet is becoming increasingly popular.

Medical science Created a chemical element that can fight cancer cells Gives hope to cancer patients all over the world; makes China one of the world leaders in the battle against the deadly disease.

After finishing the exercises, play the tape for students to follow. Then explain the questions students ask.

Step III Writing

T: Now let’s come to Writing. First read the tips. Then finish writing an essay for the magazine Modern Science.(After the brief introduction, students will discuss in groups. Then they will write an outline by themselves. Students will finish the writing outside class. After every student finishes his writing, their work will be collected and on display.)

Step Ⅳ Homework Finish writing your essay.

篇11：陈情表(粤教版必修五) 教案教学设计

陈情表(粤教版必修五) 教案教学设计

教学目的

一、引导学生体会作者至真至诚的亲情忠情；

二、引导学生赏析本文文思缜密，脉络分明，陈情于事、寓理于情的构思艺术和骈散结合形象生动的语言艺术；

三、继续指导学生积累常用的文言词语和相关文化常识；

教学重点、难点

一、本文写法上的特点：融情于事

二、李密为什么辞不就职？

教学时数：两课时

教学内容与步骤:

第一课时

教学要点：

1、指导学生熟读课文，背诵第一、三段，整体感知课文大意；

2、指导学生积累文言词语及相关常识。

一、导入课题

以简介作者及后人对该文的评价导入。

李密自幼丧父，母改嫁，赖祖母刘氏抚养。李密侍奉祖母甚孝，故以“孝”名于乡里。李密为人刚正，颇有文名，年轻时曾仕蜀汉，表现出相当高的外交才能。晋武帝为稳定局势，打起了“以孝治天下”的旗号。为此李密曾被地方推荐为“孝廉”和“秀才”，但他因侍奉祖母而未去应召。后来晋武帝征召他为太子洗马，催逼甚紧，于是写下了《陈情表》这篇表文，再次以祖母年高无人奉养为理由婉言辞谢。文章言辞恳切，真挚动人。人言读《出师表》不哭者不忠，读《陈情表》不哭者不孝。千百年来，人们常以忠则《出师》，孝则《陈情》相提并论，可见李密的《陈情表》具有相当强烈的感人力量。

二、熟读背诵

1、学生轻声诵读课文，对照注解，自己初步疏通课文；同时提醒学生注意以下词句：

臣以险衅 夙遭闵凶 门衰祚薄 日薄西山 茕茕孑立 床蓐

猥以贱微 生当陨首 责臣逋慢 犹蒙矜育 过蒙拨擢 宠命优渥

期功强近终鲜兄弟 除臣洗马 刘病日笃 更相为命

2、注意以下加点虚词的词义和用法：

以：臣以险衅 臣以供养无主 猥以微贱 臣具表以闻 圣朝以孝治天下 但以刘日薄西山 臣无祖母，无以至今日

3、注意以下加点的实词：

慈父见背 二州伯牧所见明知 形影相吊 晚有儿息 逮奉圣朝 察

臣孝廉 举臣秀才 拜臣郎中 拜表以闻 寻蒙国恩 除臣洗马 犹蒙矜育 不矜名节 愿乞终养 听臣微志 庶刘侥幸 不胜…之情 臣之辛苦

4、注意以下句式：

是以区区不能废远。 州司临门，急于星火。

三、指导学生朗读全文，提醒学生注意各段的感情基调。

第一段：凄苦，悲凉； 第二段：感激，恳切；

第三段：真挚，诚恳； 第四段：忠诚，恳切，期待。

1、指导学生背诵第一段。

2、总起：臣以险衅，夙遭闵凶

父死母嫁---祖母抚养---少年多病---无亲无戚---祖母病卧

2、熟读第二段。

3、指导背诵第三段。

孝治大道---不矜名节---宠命优渥---祖母病笃---不能废远

4、熟读第四段。

5、讨论：结合上节课反复诵读课文的体会，你认为“情”在本文中有哪几层含意？

6、完成课后练习

第二课时

教学要点：

1、引导学生赏析本文文思缜密，脉络分明，陈情于事、寓理于情的构思艺术；2、引导学生赏析本文形象生动骈散结合自然精粹的语言。

一、导入课题

二、赏析构思艺术

1、讨论：在陈请终养祖母这个要求时，李密碰到了什么困难？

引导：作者处在一种忠孝两难的矛盾境地里，请大家把作者的这种矛盾境地读出来。

进一步引导：什么地方写了“孝情”？

第一段，请一二组同学朗读第一段，在第三段中找一句话来概括这一段的意思：臣无祖母，无以至今日；祖母无臣，无以终余年。

进一步引导：什么地方写“忠情”？

第二段，请三四组同学朗读第二段，也在第三段中找一句话来概括这一段的意思：过蒙拔擢，宠命优渥。

2、祖母情深似海，圣上恩重如山；在这样一个二难的境地里，李密是被动的，言辞稍有不慎，不仅达不到陈请的目的，还有可能招来杀身之祸。下面我们来看看李密是如何化解矛盾，变被动为主动的。

3、思考讨论：请补写出“伏惟圣朝以孝治天下，凡在故老，犹蒙矜育，况臣孤苦，特为尤甚。”后面省略的一句话，并想想作者为什么要省略这句话？

引导：这个一个三段论式的推理，作者大前提，小前提，但结论却没有说，请你说出结论，并想想作者为什么不把这个结论直接了当地说出来，而是宕开一笔，写自己少仕伪朝的事？

4、思考：假设你是晋武帝与李密面谈，此时在此处李密直接提出了终养祖母的请求，你晋武帝能不能一两句话就把李密驳得哑口无言？

引导：晋武可能会说，既然你要终养祖母以尽孝心，为什么在蜀汉你又出来做官呢？

因此，李密深知，这段历史是不能回避的，只能剖明自己心迹：一仕伪朝“本图宦达，不矜名节”，二在圣朝“宠命优渥，岂敢盘桓”让晋武明白自己的忠心。

最后再以一幅祖母病笃图深深打动了晋武帝，让他明了自己不能出仕的唯一原因只是因为祖母病重，从而提出不能废远的要求。

提示：李密在分析矛盾时将孝治天下的理与祖母病笃须尽孝的情作了对照，应作什么选择其情理不言而喻。

5、朗读思考：李密最后提出解决尽孝与尽忠两者矛盾的办法是什么？他是怎样提出这个办法的？

引导：作者以列数字作对比的方式提出了先尽孝后尽忠这一解决矛盾的办法，合情合理，再加上李密在最后再表忠心，不容晋武帝置疑，不得不答应李密的陈请。

提示：尽忠日长，尽孝日短：先尽忠后尽孝。（投影）

6、小结：将本文的第三段和第一段调整一个位置，先讲理后讲情好不好？

引导：出于情，归于理，先动之以情，再晓之以理，陈情于事，寓理于情。总之，全文首先陈述个人悲惨遭遇及家庭凄苦，突出母孙的特殊关系，作为陈情的依据。继则写自己愿意奉诏，但又以刘病日笃，处于狼狈之境，借以博取晋武同情。再则抬出以孝治天下的大旗，恳求准如所请。同时更表明自己心迹，排除了不愿出仕的政治因素。最后提出解决矛盾的方案。全文构思缜密，脉络分明，具有很强的逻辑力量。

三、赏析语言

有好的构思，还要有恰当的语言来表达，这样文章的力量才能发挥出来。《陈情表》明显的保留了赋的语言特点。《古文观止》评论《陈情表》的语言，说它“至性之言，悲恻动人”；有人说，《陈情表》的语言是有形的，有声的；读《陈情表》你可以看到李密形影相吊的孤寂，看到祖母奄奄一息的悲恻，看到帝王微笑背后的恼怒，看到作者诚惶诚恐的怖惧；你还可听少年的无助哀叹，老人病中无奈的呻吟，孝子恳切的.哀告，帝王严厉的呵斥。

四、作品评价

通过两个拓展性的问题，引导学生更深入认识本文构思慎密，语言精粹的特点。

1、讨论：有论者认为，李密反复强调孝亲，其实是为自己不奉诏仕晋而故意寻找借口。你同意这一观点吗，为什么？

引导：李密反复强调孝亲，决不是为其不奉诏仕晋而故意寻找借口。他是真心因终养祖母才难能应诏的。读完全篇，我们可以清楚地体昧到，他的孝心不是抽象的，而是充满了孙儿对祖母的一片真情。

引导：李密对蜀汉念念于怀，他曾说刘禅“可次齐桓”。更何况司马氏是以屠杀篡夺取得天下，内部矛盾重重。李密以一亡国之臣，对出仕新朝就不能不有所顾虑，而暂存观望之心了。不幸的是他这种想法，被晋武多少察觉到了，因此“州书切峻。责臣逋慢”。这就使李密在“再度表闻”时，发生了更大的困难。然而李密抓住了孝字大做文章，却又不从大道理讲起，而是委婉陈辞，动之以情，恰到好处地解决了“不从皇命”的难题。

开放性问题，各抒已见，自圆其说。

2、讨论：晋武帝为什么会答应李密终养祖母的请求？

（1）为李密的言辞和情理所动；

（2）彰显孝治天下的恩德。

3、引入前人评价，以激发学生进一步研究的兴趣。

读《出师表》不下泪者，其人必不忠；读《陈情表》不下泪者，其人必不孝；读《祭十二郎文》不下泪者，其人必不友；（以上苏轼语）读《报任安书》不下泪者，其人必不为人。（后人续）

第三课时处理练习

【教学后记】

多读是培养文言文语感的重要途径。学习本文，要组织学生在早读、课堂上多读，读出感情来，抓住“情”字作文章。还要背诵经典名句。但是学生背诵的能力很差，要反复背诵，反复默写。

篇12：《钱》粤教版必修五(网友来稿) 教案教学设计

《钱》（粤教版必修五）(网友来稿) 教案教学设计

王则柯

（执教：广州市真光中学丁洪生）

教学目标：1.梳理“钱”发展演变的历史，认识“钱”与经济活动之间紧密的关系；

2.引导学生树立正确的金钱观，探究有效避免“钱灾”的做法。

教学重点：1.认识钱与经济活动的紧密关系，探究避免“钱灾”的做法。

2.引导学生树立正确的金钱观、价值观

教学法：自主探究

课时安排：2课时（一课时梳理课文，一课时讲评“钱”的故事）

教学设计

一、导入：记得前十年有一首流行歌，《钞票》“是谁制造的钞票，它在世间呈霸道，有人为你伤了心，有人为你去坐牢…………”，这钞票，这一张张的纸片，为何有如此大的魔力呢？我们今天学习王则柯教授的一篇文章《钱》，首先请大家浏览课文，并思考：

二，走进课文

1.“钱”的形态演变的历史。（学生浏览，教师放幻灯片，列出重点字词）

教师指出重点字词，学生阅读回答，明确：（放幻灯片）

兽皮、贝壳--铁块--铜、金银--纸币--电子货币（信用卡--帐号密码）

问：请一同学说“钱”最初的作用是什么，“钱”的形态为什么会发生改变？

明确：等价交换物，信用符号。

钱是经济活动的中介，钱的演变实际上代表了经济活动的发展。

问：课文介绍了与钱相关的哪些经济活动？（略）

2.归纳与“钱”有关的经济活动，认识到经济活动的两面性：

基本的：贸易--白银时代--知识经济

其他（高级形态）：银行、金融流通（证券交易、外汇买卖）

问：这些经济活动是社会经济发展的成果，那么，它们一方面为社会的进步作出了不可估量的物质贡献，但是同时，它们又带来了哪些负面影响？

白银时代：血腥的殖民掠夺惨无人道，在欧美国家大量积累财富的时候，无数的人民被奴役，甚至丧失了生命。而且，它也造成了今天的这种“南北差距”。

金融流通：投机活动、泡沫经济、金融危机

补充资料：亚太金融风暴，人民币不贬值…………（自由谈，不拘泥一个话题）

3.就现今来讲，“白银时代”的悲剧几乎不可能再重演，但是金融投机、泡沫经济仍然是全球经济发展的潜在威胁，那么，你认为，应该怎样去有效地避免这种危机？（讨论后得出结论，用幻灯片放出结果）

（1）道德抑制：树立正确的金钱观、价值观--在不损害他人利益的基础上赚钱，“君子爱财，取之有道。”在经济活动中要讲诚信，不吵作，不欺诈！--从个人角度来说。

（2）：法律控制：经济全球化会将金融灾难全球化，所以还要加强国际合作，共同抑制金融投机活动！加强立法，全球的经济立法--从社会角度来讲。

-三、联系实际，拓展知识。

1、教师讲关于“钱”的故事，引导学生讲。

A、美国老太太和中国老太太买房子的故事。

B、中奖500万，而亲人反目的故事。

2、学生分组准备讲故事，一个主讲，几个评说。

讲故事，重表述。

评故事，抓中心。（师生共评，具体过程略）

3、老师最后讲故事《税务官家的枪声》，故意不讲结果，让同学们补，课说说原因。

补出结果后再总评。

附《税务官家的枪声》原文

爱莎是税务官的妻子，他们住在荒凉的草原上。丈夫由于工作忙，很少回家。这天下午，天气又阴又冷，下起了大雪，爱莎很担心丈夫的身体。没想到，丈夫突然回到了家，爱莎很高兴。可是丈夫看起来很不高兴，爱莎轻轻地走到丈夫身边，问道：“你怎么了？”丈夫闷闷不乐地说：“告诉你一个坏消息，我的一个朋友通知我，说商业银行要倒闭了，过会儿我要赶到芭比镇，把咱们的存款取出来。”“现在就走吗？”“是的`，时间很紧。”然后他又指着带回来的一个鼓囊囊的包说：“这一大包钞票是我刚收上来的税款，没来得及上交，我怕路上不安全就先带回来了，你找个地方藏好了。”可是往哪儿藏呢？夫妻俩商量了一下，决定把钱放在一个饼干盒子里，然后藏在厨房的地板下。

丈夫临走，千叮嘱，万叮嘱：“不要让任何人进来，不管他有什么借口。我办好事，马上就回来。”

爱莎目送丈夫消失在漫天风雪中，眼泪流了下来，丈夫太辛苦了！

几个小时后，夜幕降临了，房屋被黑暗和白雪笼罩着，更加显得孤零零的。爱莎没有心思吃饭，想早点儿休息，就又仔细地把门窗检查了一遍。

就在这时，她听到屋外有响声，好像是风声。她竖起耳朵仔细听了听，不对，是有人在摩挲门窗！爱莎的心一下子提了起来。接着，她又听到了敲门声，低沉而急促。

怎么办？爱莎想起家里有一支猎枪，便找了出来，拉开枪栓。真倒霉，猎枪里没火药！本来有两支猎枪，丈夫走时带走了一支，放在家里的偏偏没火药。

没办法，她只好拿着这支空枪，壮着胆子，朝那人喊：“你是谁？”

“夫人，我是一个伤员，迷了路，实在走不动了，请让我进来歇一歇吧。”

爱莎一听是伤员，不禁松了口气，客客气气地说：“我丈夫不在家，我不能让陌生人进来。”

“可是，我会在你家门前冻死的。”接着他又恳求：“让我进来吧，我不会伤害你的。”

爱莎心软了，迟疑了一下说：“那你进来吧。”

她打开门，那人带着一股寒气进来了。只见他个子高高的，但很苍白，身上挂满了雪花，手臂上还打着绷带。[www.ydao.net]

爱莎热心地把这个伤员扶到靠近壁炉的椅子上，又帮他洗了伤口，换了绷带，把自己准备好的晚饭端给他吃。趁着他吃饭，她又在后面一间屋里给他铺好床。那人连连道谢，吃完饭，躺了下来，很快就呼呼入睡了。

可是他真的入睡了吗？还是在骗自己？

爱莎没敢睡下去，她不停地在卧室里踱着步。夜，静悄悄的，只有柴火发出轻微的劈啪声……

突然，她听到一阵低低的声音，爱莎的心一紧，是隔壁那人在搞鬼吗？她举起灯，蹑手蹑脚地走过去，耳朵紧贴着门缝，里面传来那人很响的呼吸声。难道是装的吗？她推开门，走进去，俯身去看那伤兵，他似乎真的睡着了。

她回到厅里，又听见了那奇怪的声音。这次，她听明白了，有人在撬前门的锁！她立即从工具箱中拿出丈夫的大折刀，跑到伤员的床前，使劲地摇他，伤员醒了，看到她手中明晃晃的刀，“啊”地惊叫了一声。

“嘘--不要出声，有人在撬门，快帮我一把！”

“什么，小偷吗？别开玩笑了，这里根本没有什么东西好偷。”

“有--厨房下面藏着一大笔钱。”爱莎一着急，说漏了嘴，她恨不得把自己的舌头咬下去。

那伤员并没有注意那么多，只是说：“好吧，你拿好我的枪，我右手受伤了，不能开枪，把刀给我。”

这时，爱莎听到外面那个人在开门闩，便当机立断，拿过枪去。

伤员告诉她：“你站在门边，第一个人一进来你就开火。枪膛里有6粒子弹，你要连续开枪，直到打倒他，不再动弹。我来对付第二个人。现在你把灯吹灭。”

爱莎吹灭了灯，屋子里一下子全黑了，撬门声也随之而停，可很快，门外又传来了撬门声。这时，门被扭开了，有个人窜了进来。爱莎来不及想什么，就扣动了扳机，那人应声而倒，但很快，他又用手支撑着要站起来，爱莎开了第二枪，那人又倒下了，可是他还不死心，又用膝盖一点点地往过移，爱莎又补了一枪。这下，他慢慢地倒下去，一动不动了。

那伤兵走上前去，骂道：“妈的，只有一个强盗！”接着又竖起大母指说：“好枪法，夫人！”

他把尸体翻过来，那人还戴着面具。把面具揭下来，爱莎凑了上去。“啊--”她尖声叫起来，这个抢劫犯竟然是自己的丈夫！

原来爱莎的丈夫虽身为税务官，但嗜赌成瘾，早已债台高筑，银行里的那笔存款，其实早被他输得干干净净。这天，他收到一大笔税款，就动起了歪心思：把款藏在家里，骗过妻子，晚上偷走，再叫妻子上保险公司索要财产保险。实在要不到，也没关系，钱是妻子丢的，坐牢也是妻子的事。没想到，算来算去，反算掉了自己的性命！

8月8日 ycdhs@163.com

作者邮箱： ycdhs@163.com

篇13：译林模块5 Unit Project 教学案(译林牛津版高二英语必修五教案教学设计)

一．Analyze the structure of the text

Paragraph1 _________________________________________________________________

Paragraph2_________________________________________________________________

Paragraph 3_________________________________________________________________

Paragraph 4_________________________________________________________________

Paragraph 5_________________________________________________________________

structure of the article

part1______________________________________________________________________

part2______________________________________________________________________

part3______________________________________________________________________

二．Language points

1. the third longest river _________________________

2. raise v.

1)raise a heavy box

2)raise money for the nature reserve

3)raise a big family

4)raise concern both nationally and internationally raise a question

cf: rise/raise

3. both nationally and internationally = ___________________________

4. not only… but also不仅……而且

可连接两个并列的名词，动词，例：

He is not only _______________ but also ________________.

He not only_________________________, but also ____________________________.

not only 放在句首时，句子要倒装

观众不仅能感觉到攀登珠穆郎玛峰的每一步,还能感觉到寒冷,疲劳,品尝到食物,闻到气味,感受到山上的风景以及自然界的声音。(M4U1reading)

_______ _______ ______every step of climbing Mount Qomolangma felt by the viewer, ______ ________ the cold, the tiredness, the food, the smells, the sights and the sounds of the mountain can all be experienced.

_______ ______ _______Rome a city and a republic , _______ ______ ______ also ______ become the capital of one of the largest empires in history. (M3U3P58)

5. the amount of ……的数量

cf the number of /a number of

6. rely on 依靠，依赖(upon)，/__________________

rely on/ upon sb. foe sth … /to do sth. 指望某人做某事

7. result in导致= lead to /______________

cf. result from= be due to

8. thankfully幸运的是=______________ / __________

9. under way (to do sth) 在进行中

under construction 建设中

under discussion 讨论中

10. focus on/upon 集中，关注

11. assess

评价某人的工作 assess sb.'s efforts

Damages were assessed at 1000 RMB.

Cf: assess / access

12. is home to…/is the home of …是……的家园

13. a diverse range of各种各样的= various/ a variety of

14. lower reaches of the river 河流的下游

15. prohibit …from…禁止cf. prevent/protect/stop/keep ….from…./forbid

16. concerning prep. 关于

have a long way to go to solve all the problems concerning theYangtze River

be concerned about/for be concerned with

concerned parents all the people concerned

17. effort (c)努力

spare no effort (s) to do全力以赴 make an effort/efforts to do …

cf: effort/effect/affect

18. appreciate 欣赏，感激

appreciate (one’s) doing

I'd appreciate it if ......

19. years to come= coming years

20.remain vi. 保持, 逗留, 剩余

it remains to be seen…. 尚待分晓

link-v +adj/doing/done/…

cf; remain / leave remaining / left remains / ruins

构词法(供自学)

1. non-governmental非政府的

non是否定前缀，例：nonstop train直达车

2. illegal 非法的 il-否定前缀，与in-/im-/ir为一组，例：

incorrect, impossible, irregular

3. endanger v. 危及

en-动词前缀，例：enlarge v. 使……变大，增大

I. 单项选择

1. Some students ________ their hands, showing that why have questions to ask.

A. put B. raised C. rose D. lifted

2. Not only ________ polluted but also __________ crowded.

A. was the city; were the streets

B. the city was; were the streets

C. was the city; the streets were

D. the city was; the streets were

3. The villagers in some rural areas mainly _______ on wells for their water without being able to use running water.

A. delay B. reply C. rely D. deny

4. Floods resulted __________ heavy rains.

A. from B. in C. on D. at

5. What _________ you to think so?

A. led B. had C. made D. advised

6. He is advised __________ .

A. that he gave up smoking B. giving up smoking

C. to give up smoking D. that he gives up smoking

7. -The new building was _____.

-I hope we’ll move into it by the end of the year.

A. under being construction B. in construction

C. on construction D. under construction

8. All her energies are _________ upon her children and she seems to have little time for anything else.

A. guided B. aimed C. directed D. focused

9. Having a trip abroad is certainly good for the old couple, but it remains _________ whether they will enjoy it.

A. to see B. to be seen C. seeing D. seen

10. _________ his proposal, there were pros and cons.

A. Concern B. Concerns C. Concerning D. Concerned

11. The rescue team made every ________ to find the missing mountain climber.

A. effort B. effect C. affect D. efforts

12. I would appreciate __________ back this afternoon.

A. you to call B. you call C. your calling D. you’re calling

参考答案

Paragraph 1

The environmental problems of the Yangtze River have raised concern.

Paragraph 2

Many people have recognized the importance of protecting the Yangtze River and many environmental organizations and projects have been set up.

Paragraph 3

Two special government projects are under way to protect the river. One is the water and soil preservation project.

Paragraph 4

The second project is a nature reserve for white-flag dolphins.

Paragraph 5

The environmental situation of the Yangtze River is improving.

structure of the article

Paragraph 1 The environmental problems of the Yangtze River have raised concern.

Paragraphs 2-4 A lot of work has been done to protect the river.

Paragraph 5 The environmental situation of the Yangtze River is improving.

单选 1-12 BCCAA CDDBC CC

【人教新高二教案学案一体化unit5-6(新课标版高二英语必修五教案教学设计)】相关文章：

1.高二 Unit 12 全单元教案(新课标版高二英语必修五教案教学设计)

2.认识时间（二） 教案教学设计(人教新课标一年级下册)

3.《气象物候》教学案(九年级必修) 教案教学设计

4.趣味语文 教案教学设计(粤教版高二必修四)

5.《贝多芬百年祭》教学设计(鲁人版高二必修) 教案教学设计

6.牛津版高二模块6 Unit 2 全单元教学案(译林牛津版高一英语必修二教案教学设计)

7.解决问题 教案教学设计(人教新课标三年级上册)

8.英语必修二unit1教案

9.陈情表(鲁人版高一必修) 教案教学设计

10.人教必修5 Unit 1 Great scientists 教案教学设计(人教版英语高二)